Page 1 — ® RELION PROTECTION AND CONTROL 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 4 Copyright This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose. The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
Page 5 Other than under explicit contractual commitments, in no event shall ABB be responsible or liable for any loss or damage resulting from the use of this manual or the application of the equipment.
Page 6 Conformity This product complies with following directive and regulations. Directives of the European parliament and of the council: • Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Directive 2014/30/EU • Low-voltage Directive 2014/35/EU • RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU UK legislations: • Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016 • Electrical Equipment (Safety) Regulations 2016 •...
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Introduction..................... 21 This manual.............................21 Intended audience..........................21 Product documentation........................22 1.3.1 Product documentation set....................22 1.3.2 Document revision history....................23 1.3.3 Related documentation....................... 23 Symbols and conventions........................24 1.4.1 Symbols...........................24 1.4.2 Document conventions......................24 1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols................... 26 620 series overview.................36 Overview..............................36 2.1.1 Product series version history....................36...
Page 8 Contents 3.1.8 Binary input settings in card location Xnnn..............56 3.1.9 Ethernet front port settings....................56 3.1.10 Ethernet rear port settings....................56 3.1.11 General system settings...................... 57 3.1.12 HMI settings...........................58 3.1.13 IEC 60870-5-103 settings....................58 3.1.14 IEC 61850-8-1 MMS settings....................60 3.1.15 Modbus settings........................
Page 9 Contents Nonvolatile memory........................... 108 3.10 Sensor inputs for currents and voltages..................108 3.11 Binary inputs............................112 3.11.1 Binary input filter time......................112 3.11.2 Binary input inversion......................112 3.11.3 Oscillation suppression...................... 113 3.12 Binary outputs............................113 3.12.1 Power output contacts.......................114 3.12.2 Signal output contacts....................... 117 3.13 RTD/mA inputs.............................119 3.13.1...
Page 10 Contents 3.17.5 Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC..................172 3.17.6 Set-reset (8 pcs) SRGAPC ....................174 3.17.7 Move (8 pcs) MVGAPC ......................177 3.17.8 Integer value move MVI4GAPC..................178 3.17.9 Analog value scaling SCA4GAPC ..................179 3.17.10 Local/remote control function block CONTROL............182 3.17.11 Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC ...............190 3.17.12 Remote generic control points SPCRGAPC..............195 3.17.13...
Page 11 Contents 4.2.6 Harmonics-based earth-fault protection HAEFPTOC..........460 4.2.7 Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE............468 4.2.8 Multifrequency admittance-based earth-fault protection MFADPSDE....480 Differential protection........................501 4.3.1 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for machines MPDIF... 502 4.3.2 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for two-winding transformers TR2PTDF....................519 4.3.3 Numerical stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault protection LREFPNDF........................
Page 12 Contents 4.9.6 Signals........................... 755 4.9.7 Settings..........................756 4.9.8 Monitored data........................756 4.9.9 Technical data ........................756 4.9.10 Technical revision history....................757 4.10 Motor start-up supervision STTPMSU.................... 757 4.10.1 Identification........................757 4.10.2 Function block........................757 4.10.3 Functionality.........................757 4.10.4 Operation principle......................758 4.10.5 Application........................... 763 4.10.6 Signals........................... 766 4.10.7 Settings..........................
Page 13 Contents 5.2.1 Identification........................805 5.2.2 Function block........................806 5.2.3 Functionality........................806 5.2.4 Operation principle......................806 5.2.5 Application..........................812 5.2.6 Signals........................... 813 5.2.7 Settings..........................814 5.2.8 Monitored data........................815 5.2.9 Technical data ........................815 5.2.10 Technical revision history....................815 Master trip TRPPTRC.......................... 816 5.3.1 Identification........................816 5.3.2 Function block........................
Page 14 Contents 5.6.3 Functionality........................829 5.6.4 Operation principle......................829 5.6.5 Application........................... 832 5.6.6 Signals........................... 833 5.6.7 Settings..........................834 5.6.8 Monitored data........................834 5.6.9 Technical data........................835 Fault locator SCEFRFLO........................835 5.7.1 Identification........................835 5.7.2 Function block........................835 5.7.3 Functionality........................835 5.7.4 Operation principle......................836 5.7.5 Application...........................
Page 15 Contents 6.2.5 Application........................... 879 6.2.6 Signals...........................883 6.2.7 Settings..........................884 6.2.8 Monitored data........................884 6.2.9 Technical data ........................884 6.2.10 Technical revision history....................884 Advanced current circuit supervision for transformers CTSRCTF..........885 6.3.1 Identification........................885 6.3.2 Function block........................885 6.3.3 Functionality........................885 6.3.4 Operation principle......................
Page 16 Contents 6.6.6 Signals...........................906 6.6.7 Settings..........................907 6.6.8 Monitored data........................908 6.6.9 Technical data ........................908 6.6.10 Technical revision history....................908 Condition monitoring functions............909 Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR................909 7.1.1 Identification........................909 7.1.2 Function block........................909 7.1.3 Functionality........................909 7.1.4 Operation principle......................909 7.1.5 Application...........................
Page 17 Contents 8.3.3 Functionality........................976 8.3.4 Operation principle......................976 8.3.5 Application........................... 979 8.3.6 Signals..........................980 8.3.7 Settings..........................981 8.3.8 Monitored data........................981 8.3.9 Technical data ........................981 8.3.10 Technical revision history....................981 Control functions.................. 982 Circuit breaker control CBXCBR, Disconnector control DCXSWI and Earthing switch control ESXSWI..........................982 9.1.1 Identification........................
Page 18 Contents 9.4.3 Functionality........................1012 9.4.4 Operation principle......................1014 9.4.5 Counters..........................1027 9.4.6 Application......................... 1028 9.4.7 Signals..........................1039 9.4.8 Settings..........................1040 9.4.9 Monitored data......................... 1043 9.4.10 Technical data ........................1044 9.4.11 Technical revision history....................1044 Tap changer control with voltage regulator OLATCC............... 1045 9.5.1 Identification........................1045 9.5.2 Function block........................
Page 19 Contents 10.3.3 Functionality........................1089 10.3.4 Operation principle......................1090 10.3.5 Recorded data........................1098 10.3.6 Application......................... 1100 10.3.7 Signals..........................1102 10.3.8 Settings..........................1102 10.3.9 Monitored data........................1105 10.3.10 Technical data ........................1107 10.4 Voltage unbalance VSQVUB......................1108 10.4.1 Identification........................1108 10.4.2 Function block........................1108 10.4.3 Functionality........................
Page 20 Contents 13.4.1 Ethernet RJ-45 front connection..................1175 13.4.2 Ethernet rear connections....................1175 13.4.3 EIA-232 serial rear connection..................1176 13.4.4 EIA-485 serial rear connection..................1176 13.4.5 Optical ST serial rear connection................... 1176 13.4.6 Communication interfaces and protocols ..............1176 13.4.7 Rear communication modules..................1177 14 Technical data..................
Page 21: Introduction
1MRS757644 H Introduction Introduction This manual The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
Page 22: Product Documentation
Introduction 1MRS757644 H Product documentation 1.3.1 Product documentation set Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from www.abb.com/relion the ABB Web site 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 23: Document Revision History
2.0 FP1 Content updated H/2022-02-04 2.0 FP1 Content fixed http:// Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site www.abb.com/substationautomation 1.3.3 Related documentation Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB http://www.abb.com/substationautomation Web site 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 24: Symbols And Conventions
Introduction 1MRS757644 H Symbols and conventions 1.4.1 Symbols The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock. The warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in personal injury. The caution icon indicates important information or warning related to the concept discussed in the text.
Page 25 1MRS757644 H Introduction When the function starts, the START output is set to TRUE. • This document assumes that the parameter setting visibility is "Advanced". 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 26: Functions, Codes And Symbols
Introduction 1MRS757644 H 1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols All available functions are listed in the table. All of them may not be applicable to all products. Table 1: Functions included in the relays Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Protection Three-phase non-di- PHLPTOC1 3I>...
Page 27 1MRS757644 H Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Admittance-based EFPADM1 Yo> -> (1) 21YN (1) earth-fault protection EFPADM2 Yo> -> (2) 21YN (2) EFPADM3 Yo> -> (3) 21YN (3) Wattmetric-based WPWDE1 Po> -> (1) 32N (1) earth-fault protection WPWDE2 Po>...
Page 28 Introduction 1MRS757644 H Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI FRPFRQ3 f>/f<,df/dt (3) 81 (3) FRPFRQ4 f>/f<,df/dt (4) 81 (4) FRPFRQ5 f>/f<,df/dt (5) 81 (5) FRPFRQ6 f>/f<,df/dt (6) 81 (6) Overexcitation pro- OEPVPH1 U/f> (1) 24 (1) tection OEPVPH2 U/f> (2) 24 (2) Three-phase thermal T1PTTR1...
Page 29 1MRS757644 H Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI High-impedance HREFPDIF1 dIoHi> (1) 87NH (1) based restricted HREFPDIF2 dIoHi> (2) 87NH (2) earth-fault protection Circuit breaker failure CCBRBRF1 3I>/Io>BF (1) 51BF/51NBF (1) protection CCBRBRF2 3I>/Io>BF (2) 51BF/51NBF (2) CCBRBRF3 3I>/Io>BF (3) 51BF/51NBF (3) Three-phase inrush INRPHAR1...
Page 30 Introduction 1MRS757644 H Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI MAPGAPC17 MAP (17) MAP (17) MAPGAPC18 MAP (18) MAP (18) Automatic switch-on- CVPSOF1 CVPSOF (1) SOFT/21/50 (1) to-fault logic (SOF) Voltage vector shift VVSPPAM1 VS (1) 78V (1) protection Directional reactive DQPTUV1 Q>...
Page 31 1MRS757644 H Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Three-independent- PH3IPTOC1 3I_3>>> (1) 50P/51P_3 (1) phase non- direction- al overcurrent protec- tion, instantaneous stage Directional three-in- DPH3LPDOC1 3I_3> -> (1) 67-1_3 (1) dependent-phase di- DPH3LPDOC2 3I_3> -> (2) 67-1_3 (2) rectional overcurrent protection, low stage Directional three-in-...
Page 32 Introduction 1MRS757644 H Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Autoreclosing DARREC1 O -> I (1) 79 (1) DARREC2 O -> I (2) 79 (2) Synchronism and en- SECRSYN1 SYNC (1) 25 (1) ergizing check Tap changer position TPOSYLTC1 TPOSM (1) 84M (1) indication Tap changer control...
Page 33 1MRS757644 H Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Sequence current CSMSQI1 I1, I2, I0 (1) I1, I2, I0 (1) measurement CSMSQI2 I1, I2, I0 (B) (1) I1, I2, I0 (B) (1) Residual current RESCMMXU1 Io (1) In (1) measurement RESCMMXU2 Io (2) In (2)
Page 34 Introduction 1MRS757644 H Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC1 TOF (1) TOF (1) TOFGAPC2 TOF (2) TOF (2) TOFGAPC3 TOF (3) TOF (3) TOFGAPC4 TOF (4) TOF (4) Time delay on (8 pcs) TONGAPC1 TON (1) TON (1) TONGAPC2...
Page 35 1MRS757644 H Introduction Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI UDFCNT9 UDCNT (9) UDCNT (9) UDFCNT10 UDCNT (10) UDCNT (10) UDFCNT11 UDCNT (11) UDCNT (11) UDFCNT12 UDCNT (12) UDCNT (12) Programmable but- FKEYGGIO1 FKEY (1) FKEY (1) tons (16 buttons) Logging functions Disturbance recorder RDRE1 DR (1) DFR (1)
Page 36: 620 Series Overview
620 series overview 1MRS757644 H 620 series overview Overview 620 series is a product family of relays designed for protection, control, measurement and supervision of utility substations and industrial switchgear and equipment. The design of the relay has been guided by the IEC 61850 standard for communication and interoperability of substation automation devices.
Page 37: Local Hmi
• REF620 Connectivity Package Ver.2.1 or later • REM620 Connectivity Package Ver.2.1 or later • RET620 Connectivity Package Ver.2.1 or later www.abb.com/ Download connectivity packages from the ABB Web site substationautomation or directly with Update Manager in PCM600. Local HMI The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the protection relay.
Page 38: Leds
620 series overview 1MRS757644 H Table 2: Display Character size Rows in the view Characters per row Small, mono-spaced (6 × 12 pixels) Large, variable width (13 × 14 pixels) 8 or more The display view is divided into four basic areas. Header Content Icon...
Page 39 1MRS757644 H 620 series overview Figure 4: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push buttons and RJ-45 communication port 2.2.3.1 Programmable push buttons with LEDs Figure 5: Programmable push buttons with LEDs The LHMI keypad on the left side of the protection relay contains 16 programmable push buttons with red LEDs.
Page 40: Web Hmi
620 series overview 1MRS757644 H The LEDs can also be independently configured to bring general indications or important alarms to the operator's attention. To provide a description of the button function, it is possible to insert a paper sheet behind the transparent film next to the button. Web HMI The WHMI allows secure access to the protection relay via a Web browser.
Page 41: Authorization
Administrator user rights. If the relay-specific Administrator password is forgotten, ABB can provide a one- time reliable key to access the protection relay. For support, contact ABB. The recovery of the Administrator password takes a few days. User authorization is disabled by default for LHMI but WHMI always uses authorization.
Page 42: Audit Trail
620 series overview 1MRS757644 H Table 3: Predefined user categories Username User rights VIEWER Read only access OPERATOR • Selecting remote or local state with (only locally) • Changing setting groups • Controlling • Clearing indications ENGINEER • Changing settings •...
Page 43 1MRS757644 H 620 series overview Table 4: Audit trail events Audit trail event Description Configuration change Configuration files changed Firmware change Firmware changed Firmware change fail Firmware change failed Setting group remote User changed setting group remotely Setting group local User changed setting group locally Control remote DPC object control remote...
Page 44: Communication
620 series overview 1MRS757644 H Audit trail event Authority logging level Firmware change ● ● ● ● ● Firmware change fail ● ● ● ● ● Setting group re- ● ● ● ● mote Setting group local ● ● ● ●...
Page 45: Self-Healing Ethernet Ring
1MRS757644 H 620 series overview connected to Ethernet-based communication systems via the RJ-45 connector (100Base-FX) or the fiber-optic LC connector (100Base-FX). 2.5.1 Self-healing Ethernet ring For the correct operation of self-healing loop topology, it is essential that the external switches in the network support the RSTP protocol and that it is enabled in the switches.
Page 46 620 series overview 1MRS757644 H protocols defined in the IEC 62439-3:2012 standard: parallel redundancy protocol PRP and high-availability seamless redundancy HSR protocol. Both protocols rely on the duplication of all transmitted information via two Ethernet ports for one logical network connection. Therefore, both are able to overcome the failure of a link or switch with a zero-switchover time, thus fulfilling the stringent real-time requirements for the substation automation horizontal communication and time synchronization.
Page 47: Process Bus
1MRS757644 H 620 series overview and SAN to remove additional PRP information from the Ethernet frames. In some cases, default PC workstation adapters are not able to handle the maximum-length Ethernet frames with the PRP trailer. There are different alternative ways to connect a laptop or a workstation as SAN to a PRP network.
Page 48 620 series overview 1MRS757644 H by any protection relay to perform different protection, automation and control functions. UniGear Digital switchgear concept relies on the process bus together with current and voltage sensors. The process bus enables several advantages for the UniGear Digital like simplicity with reduced wiring, flexibility with data availability to all devices, improved diagnostics and longer maintenance cycles.
Page 49: Secure Communication
1MRS757644 H 620 series overview Primary Secondary IEEE 1588 v2 IEEE 1588 v2 master clock master clock (optional) Managed HSR Managed HSR Ethernet Ethernet switch switch IEC 61850 Backup 1588 master clock Figure 11: Example network topology with process bus, redundancy and IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization The process bus option is available for all 620 series protection relays equipped with phase voltage inputs.
Page 50: Basic Functions
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Basic functions General parameters 3.1.1 Analog input settings, phase currents Table 6: Analog input settings, phase currents Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Primary current 1.0...6000.0 100.0 Rated primary cur- rent Secondary current 2=1A Rated secondary 2=1A current 3=5A...
Page 51: Analog Input Settings, Residual Current
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.1.2 Analog input settings, residual current Table 7: Analog input settings, residual current Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Primary current 1.0...6000.0 100.0 Primary current Secondary current 2=1A Secondary current 1=0.2A 2=1A 3=5A Amplitude Corr 0.9000...1.1000 0.0001 1.0000...
Page 52: Analog Input Settings, Residual Voltage
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Angle Corr A -8.000 … 8.000 0.0001 0.0000 Phase A Voltage phasor angle cor- rection of an exter- nal voltage trans- former Angle Corr B -8.000 … 8.000 0.0001 0.0000 Phase B Voltage phasor angle cor-...
Page 53: Authorization Settings
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.1.5 Authorization settings Table 10: Authorization settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Local override 1=True Disable authority 0=False 1=True Remote override 1=True Disable authority 0=False 1=True Local viewer Set password Local operator Set password Local engineer Set password Local administrator...
Page 54: Binary Input Settings
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.1.6 Binary input settings Table 11: Binary input settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Threshold voltage 16...176 Binary input threshold voltage Input osc. level 2...50 events/s Binary input oscil- lation suppression threshold Input osc. hyst 2...50 events/s Binary input oscil-...
Page 55: Binary Signals In Card Location Xnnn
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.1.7 Binary signals in card location Xnnn Table 12: Binary input signals in card location Xnnn Name Type Description Xnnn-Input m BOOLEAN See the application manual for terminal connections Table 13: Binary output signals in card location Xnnn Name Type Default...
Page 56: Binary Input Settings In Card Location Xnnn
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.1.8 Binary input settings in card location Xnnn Table 14: Binary input settings in card location Xnnn Name Value Unit Step Default Input m filter time 5…1000 Input m inversion 0=False 0= False 1= True 3.1.9 Ethernet front port settings Table 15: Ethernet front port settings Parameter...
Page 57: General System Settings
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.1.11 General system settings Table 17: General system settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Rated frequency 1=50Hz Rated frequency of 1=50Hz the network 2=60Hz Phase rotation 1=ABC Phase rotation or- 1=ABC 2=ACB Blocking mode 1=Freeze timer Behaviour for func- 1=Freeze timer...
Page 58: Hmi Settings
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.1.12 HMI settings Table 18: HMI settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FB naming conven- 1=IEC61850 FB naming conven- 1=IEC61850 tion tion used in IED 2=IEC60617 3=IEC-ANSI Default view 1=Measurements LHMI default view 1=Measurements 2=Main menu 3=SLD Backlight timeout...
Page 59 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Class1Priority 0=Ev High Class 1 data send- 0=Ev High ing priority rela- 1=Ev/DR Equal tionship between Events and Disturb- 2=DR High ance Recorder da- Class2Interval 0...86400 Interval in seconds to send class 2 re- sponse Frame1InUse...
Page 60: Iec 61850-8-1 Mms Settings
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Frame4InUse -1=Not in use Active Class2 -1=Not in use Frame 4 0=User frame 1=Standard frame 1 2=Standard frame 2 3=Standard frame 4=Standard frame 5=Standard frame 6=Private frame 6 7=Private frame 7 Class1OvInd 2=Rising edge Overflow Indication...
Page 61 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 20: IEC 61850-8-1 MMS settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Unit mode 0=Nominal IEC 61850-8-1 unit 1=Primary mode 0=Nominal 2=Primary-Nominal MMS client expects primary values from event reporting and data attribute reads. MMS client expects nominal values from event reporting and data attribute reads; this is the default for PCM600.
Page 62: Modbus Settings
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.1.15 Modbus settings Table 21: Modbus settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 5=off Enable or disable 1=on this protocol in- 5=off stance Port 3=Ethernet - TCP 1 Port selection for 1=COM 1 this protocol in- 2=COM 2 stance.
Page 63 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Event buffering 0=Keep oldest Selects whether the 0=Keep oldest oldest or newest 1=Keep newest events are kept in the case of event buffer overflow. Event backoff 1...500 Defines how many events have to be read after event buffer overflow to...
Page 64: Dnp3 Settings
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.1.16 DNP3 settings Table 22: DNP3 settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 5=off Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Port 3=Ethernet - TCP 1 Communication interface se- 1=COM 1 lection 2=COM 2 3=Ethernet - TCP 1 4=Ethernet TCP+UDP 1 Unit address...
Page 65 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description UR retries 0...65535 Unsolicited retries before switching to UR offline mode UR TO 0...65535 5000 Unsolicited response timeout UR offline interval 0...65535 Unsolicited offline interval UR Class 1 Min events 0...999 Min number of class 1 events to generate UR...
Page 66: Com1 Serial Communication Settings
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Default Var Obj 23 6=6:16bit FrzCnt 1=32 bit frz counter event; 1=1:32bit FrzCnt evt evt&time 2=16 bit frz counter event; 2=2:16bit FrzCnt 5=32 bit frz counter event with time; 6=16 bit frz counter event with time.
Page 67: Com2 Serial Communication Settings
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 23: COM1 serial communication settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Fiber mode 0=No fiber Fiber mode for 0=No fiber COM1 2=Fiber optic Serial mode 1=RS485 2Wire Serial mode for 1=RS485 2Wire COM1 2=RS485 4Wire 3=RS232 no hand- shake 4=RS232 with hand-...
Page 68: Time Settings
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.1.19 Time settings Table 25: Time settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Time format 1=24H:MM:SS:MS Time format 1=24H:MM:SS:MS 2=12H:MM:SS:MS Date format 1=DD.MM.YYYY Date format 1=DD.MM.YYYY 2=DD/MM/YYYY 3=DD-MM-YYYY 4=MM.DD.YYYY 5=MM/DD/YYYY 6=YYYY-MM-DD 7=YYYY-DD-MM 8=YYYY/DD/MM Self-supervision The protection relay's extensive self-supervision system continuously supervises the relay’s software, hardware and certain external circuits.
Page 69 3-5 are opened. Figure 12: Output contact The internal fault code indicates the type of internal relay fault. When a fault appears, the code must be recorded so that it can be reported to ABB customer service. 620 series...
Page 70 Start up error: If relay SW has just been updated, redo System error HW/SW mismatch it. If not recovered, contact your nearest ABB representative to check the next possible corrective action. Internal Fault Start up or runtime Yes (2) Yes (3) Restart the relay.
Page 71 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Fault indication Fault Additional Fast self- Slow 10 Immediate Action in permanent fault state code information recovery min self- permanen attempt recovery t IRF- (# of (# of mode attempts) attempts) Internal Fault Runtime error: Faul- Yes (2) Yes (3) Check wirings.
Page 72 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Fault indication Fault Additional Fast self- Slow 10 Immediate Action in permanent fault state code information recovery min self- permanen attempt recovery t IRF- (# of (# of mode attempts) attempts) Internal Fault Start up error: Card Check that the card in slot X105 is prop- Conf.
Page 73 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Fault indication Fault Additional Fast self- Slow 10 Immediate Action in permanent fault state code information recovery min self- permanen attempt recovery t IRF- (# of (# of mode attempts) attempts) Internal Fault Start up error: Card Check that the card in slot X130 is prop- Conf.
Page 74: Warnings
LHMI. The warning indication message can be manually cleared. If a warning appears, record the name and code so that it can be provided to ABB customer service. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 75 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 27: Warning indications and codes Warning indication Warning code Additional information An internal system error has occurred. Warning System warning A watchdog reset has occurred. Warning Watchdog reset The auxiliary supply voltage has dropped too Warning low.
Page 76: Fail-Safe Principle For Relay Protection
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Warning indication Warning code Additional information Error in the SMV configuration SMV Warning Redundant Ethernet (HSR/PRP) communica- Warning tion interrupted. Comm. channel down A new composition has not been acknowl- Warning edged/accepted. Unack card comp. Error in protection communication. Warning Protection comm.
Page 77 1MRS757644 H Basic functions is typically related to satisfying these two performance criteria. Depending on the requirements set to the electricity distribution process, one of the criteria may get more attention than the other. However, in some industrial electricity distribution networks, the main (productization) process is so dependent on reliable electricity supply that both criteria are addressed equally.
Page 78 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Control + AUX. POWER <U Control - Figure 14: Motor feeder fail-safe trip circuit principle, example 2 Protection relay Emergency stop Circuit breaker (CB) Protection relay trip output Internal relay fault indication <U CB undervoltage trip coil CB trip coil 1 Distributed process control system Miniature circuit breaker...
Page 79 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Internal relay fault indication <U CB undervoltage trip coil CB trip coil 1 OFF delay time relay Miniature circuit breaker In example 3, the fail-safe approach aims at securing motor shutdown via an emergency switch and in case the control voltage disappears. In case of internal relay fault, the circuit breaker is tripped via an undervoltage coil after a preset time delay.
Page 80 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.2.3.2 Other critical feeders The examples given for motor feeders can be applied for other types of feeders as well. The following examples are for critical feeders in which the protection system dependability, security or both are the drivers. Control + Control + +J01...
Page 81 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Control + Control + +J01 +J02 +J02-F1 control + +J01-F1 control + +J02 -A1 +J01 -A1 -TO2 -TO2 -TO1 -TO1 AUX. POWER AUX. POWER +J02-F1 control - +J01-F1 control - Control - Control - Figure 18: Redundant protection fail-safe principle, example 2 Feeder #1 panel Feeder #2 panel Circuit breaker (CB)
Page 82 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Circuit breaker (CB) Protection relay #1 Protection relay #2 Protection relay trip output CB trip coil 1 CB trip coil 2 Miniature circuit breaker In example 3, the fail-safe approach aims at securing circuit breaker tripping even if one of the redundant relays fails.
Page 83: Led Indication Control
1MRS757644 H Basic functions protection functions. This principle is used in cases where the primary process requires absolute dependability and security from the supplying feeder protection. LED indication control 3.3.1 Function block Figure 21: Function block 3.3.2 Functionality The protection relay includes a global conditioning function LEDPTRC that is used with the protection indication LEDs.
Page 84: Functionality
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.4.1 Function block Figure 22: Function block 3.4.2 Functionality The programmable LEDs reside on the right side of the display on the LHMI. Figure 23: Programmable LEDs on the right side of the display All the programmable LEDs in the HMI of the protection relay have two colors, green and red.
Page 85 1MRS757644 H Basic functions The LED status also provides a means for resetting the individual LED via communication. The LED can also be reset from configuration with the RESET input. The resetting and clearing function for all LEDs is under the Clear menu. Figure 24 The menu structure for the programmable LEDs is presented in .
Page 86: Signals
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H "Latched-S": Latched, ON This mode is a latched function. At the activation of the input signal, the alarm shows a steady light. After acknowledgement by the local operator pressing any key on the keypad, the alarm disappears. Activating signal Acknow.
Page 87: Settings
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Name Type Default Description RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 3 BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 4 ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 4 RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 4 BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 5 ALARM...
Page 88 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Description Programmable Programmable LED LEDs LED 1 description Alarm mode 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 0=Follow-S programmable LED 1=Follow-F 2=Latched-S 3=LatchedAck-F-S Description Programmable Programmable LED LEDs LED 2 description Alarm mode 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 0=Follow-S...
Page 89: Monitored Data
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Alarm mode 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 0=Follow-S programmable LED 1=Follow-F 2=Latched-S 3=LatchedAck-F-S Description Programmable Programmable LED LEDs LED 10 description Alarm mode 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 0=Follow-S programmable LED 1=Follow-F 2=Latched-S 3=LatchedAck-F-S...
Page 90: Time Synchronization
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Programmable LED 10 Enum Status of programma- 0=None ble LED 10 1=Ok 3=Alarm Programmable LED 11 Enum Status of programma- 0=None ble LED 11 1=Ok 3=Alarm Time synchronization 3.5.1 Time master supervision GNRLLTMS 3.5.1.1 Function block Figure 29: Function block...
Page 91 1MRS757644 H Basic functions IEEE 1588 v2 time synchronization requires a communication card with redundancy support (COM0031...COM0037). When Modbus TCP or DNP3 over TCP/IP is used, SNTP or IRIG-B time synchronization should be used for better synchronization accuracy. With the legacy protocols, the synchronization message must be received within four minutes from the previous synchronization.
Page 92: Parameter Setting Groups
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 32: Time settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Time format 1=24H:MM:SS:MS Time format 1=24H:MM:SS:MS 2=12H:MM:SS:MS Date format 1=DD.MM.YYYY Date format 1=DD.MM.YYYY 2=DD/MM/YYYY 3=DD-MM-YYYY 4=MM.DD.YYYY 5=MM/DD/YYYY 6=YYYY-MM-DD 7=YYYY-DD-MM 8=YYYY/DD/MM Parameter setting groups 3.6.1 Function block Figure 30: Function block 3.6.2 Functionality...
Page 93 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 33: Optional operation modes for setting group selection SG operation mode Description Operator (Default) Setting group can be changed with the setting Settings > Setting group > Active group. Value of the output is FALSE. SG_LOGIC_SEL Logic mode 1 Setting group can be changed with binary inputs...
Page 94: Test Mode
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Input BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE The setting group 1 can be copied to any other or all groups from HMI (Copy group Test mode 3.7.1 Function blocks Figure 31: Function blocks...
Page 95: Application Configuration And Test Mode
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 36: Test mode Test mode Description Protection BEH_BLK Normal mode Normal operation FALSE IED blocked Protection working as in “Normal mode” but TRUE ACT configuration can be used to block phys- ical outputs to process. Control function commands blocked.
Page 96: Application Configuration And Control Mode
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.7.5 Application configuration and Control mode The physical outputs from commands to process are blocked with “Blocked“ mode. If physical outputs need to be blocked totally, meaning also commands from the binary inputs, the application configuration must be used to block these signals. Blocking scheme uses BEH_BLK output of CONTROL function block.
Page 97 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Name Type Default Description BI_SG_4 BOOLEAN Setting group 4 is ac- tive BI_SG_5 BOOLEAN Setting group 5 is ac- tive BI_SG_6 BOOLEAN Setting group 6 is ac- tive Table 40: CONTROL input signals Name Type Default Description CTRL_OFF BOOLEAN...
Page 98: Fault Recorder Fltrfrc
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Description BOOLEAN Control all BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 block sta- BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device LD0 test sta- Fault recorder FLTRFRC 3.8.1 Function block Figure 32: Function block 3.8.2 Functionality The protection relay has the capacity to store the records of 128 latest fault events. Fault records include fundamental or RMS current values.
Page 99: Settings
1MRS757644 H Basic functions frequency cannot be measured, nominal frequency is used for frequency and zero for Frequency gradient and validity is set accordingly. Measuring mode for phase current and residual current values can be selected with Measurement mode setting parameter. 3.8.3 Settings Table 43: FLTRFRC Non group settings (Basic)
Page 100 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Protection Enum Protection function 0=Unknown 1=PHLPTOC1 2=PHLPTOC2 6=PHHPTOC1 7=PHHPTOC2 8=PHHPTOC3 9=PHHPTOC4 12=PHIPTOC1 13=PHIPTOC2 17=EFLPTOC1 18=EFLPTOC2 19=EFLPTOC3 22=EFHPTOC1 23=EFHPTOC2 24=EFHPTOC3 25=EFHPTOC4 30=EFIPTOC1 31=EFIPTOC2 32=EFIPTOC3 35=NSPTOC1 36=NSPTOC2 -7=INTRPTEF1 -5=STTPMSU1 -3=JAMPTOC1 Table continues on the next page When TRPPTRC is triggered by any signal which does not light up the START or TRIP LEDs 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 101 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 41=PDNSPTOC1 44=T1PTTR1 46=T2PTTR1 48=MPTTR1 50=DEFLPDEF1 51=DEFLPDEF2 53=DEFHPDEF1 56=EFPADM1 57=EFPADM2 58=EFPADM3 59=FRPFRQ1 60=FRPFRQ2 61=FRPFRQ3 62=FRPFRQ4 63=FRPFRQ5 64=FRPFRQ6 65=LSHDPFRQ1 66=LSHDPFRQ2 67=LSHDPFRQ3 68=LSHDPFRQ4 69=LSHDPFRQ5 71=DPHLPDOC1 72=DPHLPDOC2 74=DPHHPDOC1 77=MAPGAPC1 78=MAPGAPC2 79=MAPGAPC3 85=MNSPTOC1 86=MNSPTOC2 88=LOFLPTUC1 90=TR2PTDF1 91=LNPLDF1 92=LREFPNDF1...
Page 102 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description 100=ROVPTOV1 101=ROVPTOV2 102=ROVPTOV3 104=PHPTOV1 105=PHPTOV2 106=PHPTOV3 108=PHPTUV1 109=PHPTUV2 110=PHPTUV3 112=NSPTOV1 113=NSPTOV2 116=PSPTUV1 118=ARCSARC1 119=ARCSARC2 120=ARCSARC3 -96=SPHIPTOC1 -93=SPHLPTOC2 -92=SPHLPTOC1 -89=SPHHPTOC2 -88=SPHHPTOC1 -87=SPHPTUV4 -86=SPHPTUV3 -85=SPHPTUV2 -84=SPHPTUV1 -83=SPHPTOV4 -82=SPHPTOV3 -81=SPHPTOV2 -80=SPHPTOV1 -25=OEPVPH4 -24=OEPVPH3 -23=OEPVPH2 -22=OEPVPH1 -19=PSPTOV2...
Page 103 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -12=PHPTUC2 -11=PHPTUC1 -9=PHIZ1 5=PHLTPTOC1 20=EFLPTOC4 26=EFHPTOC5 27=EFHPTOC6 37=NSPTOC3 38=NSPTOC4 45=T1PTTR2 54=DEFHPDEF2 75=DPHHPDOC2 89=LOFLPTUC2 103=ROVPTOV4 117=PSPTUV2 -13=PHPTUC3 3=PHLPTOC3 10=PHHPTOC5 11=PHHPTOC6 28=EFHPTOC7 29=EFHPTOC8 107=PHPTOV4 111=PHPTUV4 114=NSPTOV3 115=NSPTOV4 -30=PHDSTPDIS1 -29=TR3PTDF1 -28=HICPDIF1 -27=HIBPDIF1 -26=HIAPDIF1 -32=LSHDPFRQ8 -31=LSHDPFRQ7 70=LSHDPFRQ6...
Page 104 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -102=MAPGAPC12 -101=MAPGAPC11 -100=MAPGAPC10 -99=MAPGAPC9 -98=RESCPSCH1 -57=FDEFLPDEF2 -56=FDEFLPDEF1 -54=FEFLPTOC1 -53=FDPHLPDOC2 -52=FDPHLPDOC1 -50=FPHLPTOC1 -47=MAP12GAPC8 -46=MAP12GAPC7 -45=MAP12GAPC6 -44=MAP12GAPC5 -43=MAP12GAPC4 -42=MAP12GAPC3 -41=MAP12GAPC2 -40=MAP12GAPC1 -37=HAEFPTOC1 -35=WPWDE3 -34=WPWDE2 -33=WPWDE1 52=DEFLPDEF3 84=MAPGAPC8 93=LREFPNDF2 97=HREFPDIF2 -117=XDEFLPDEF2 -116=XDEFLPDEF1 -115=SDPHLPDOC2 -114=SDPHLPDOC1 -113=XNSPTOC2 -112=XNSPTOC1...
Page 105 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description -103=MAPGAPC13 -76=MAPGAPC18 -75=MAPGAPC17 -62=SRCPTOC1 -74=DOPPDPR3 -73=DOPPDPR2 -70=DUPPDPR2 -58=UZPDIS1 -36=UEXPDIS1 14=MFADPSDE1 -10=LVRTPTUV1 -8=LVRTPTUV2 -6=LVRTPTUV3 -122=DPH3LPDOC1 -121=DPH3HPDOC2 -120=DPH3HPDOC1 -119=PH3LPTOC2 -118=PH3LPTOC1 -79=PH3HPTOC2 -78=PH3HPTOC1 -77=PH3IPTOC1 -127=PHAPTUV1 -124=PHAPTOV1 -123=DPH3LPDOC2 -68=PHPVOC2 -67=DQPTUV2 -39=UEXPDIS2 98=MHZPDIF1 -4=MREFPTOC1 Start duration FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Maximum start dura-...
Page 106 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Max bias current IL2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Maximum phase B bias current Max bias current IL3 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Maximum phase C bias current Bias current IL1 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Bias current phase A Bias current IL2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000...
Page 107 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Current Io-CalcC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Calculated residual cur- rent (c) Current Ps-SeqC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Positive sequence cur- rent (c) Current Ng-SeqC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Negative sequence cur- rent (c) Voltage UL1 FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase A voltage Voltage UL2...
Page 108: Nonvolatile Memory
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Angle U23B - IL1B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle phase B to phase C voltage - phase A cur- rent (b) Angle U31B - IL2B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle phase C to phase A voltage - phase B cur- rent (b) Angle U12B - IL3B...
Page 109 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Figure 33: Example of ABB Rogowski current sensor KECA 80 D85 rating plate Current (Rogowski) sensor setting example In this example, an 80 A/0.150 V at 50 Hz (0.180 V at 60 Hz) sensor, such as...
Page 110 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 46: Example setting values for current (Rogowski) sensor Setting Value Primary current 150 A Rated secondary value 5.625 mV/Hz When considering setting values for current sensor interfaces and for protection functions utilizing these measurements, it should be noted that the sensor measurement inputs in the relay have limits for linear behavior.
Page 111 Primary voltage parameter is set to 10 kV. For protection relays with sensor Voltage input type is set to "Voltage sensor". The measurement support, the VT connection parameter is set to the "WYE" type. The division ratio for ABB Division ratio parameter is voltage sensors is most often 10000:1. Thus, the usually set to "10000".
Page 112: Binary Inputs
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Setting Value Voltage input type 3=Voltage sensor Division ratio 10000 3.11 Binary inputs Use only DC power for binary inputs. Use of AC power or half-wave- rectified AC power may cause damage to the binary input modules. 3.11.1 Binary input filter time The filter time eliminates debounces and short disturbances on a binary input.
Page 113: Oscillation Suppression
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.11.2 Binary input inversion Input # invert is used to invert a binary input. The parameter Table 50: Binary input states Control voltage Input # invert State of binary input FALSE (0) TRUE (1) TRUE (1) FALSE (0) When a binary input is inverted, the state of the input is TRUE (1) when no control voltage is applied to its terminals.
Page 114: Power Output Contacts
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H The contacts used for external signalling, recording and indicating, the signal outputs, need to adjust to smaller currents, but they can require a minimum current (burden) to ensure a guaranteed operation. The protection relay provides both power output and signal output contacts. To guarantee proper operation, the type of the contacts used are chosen based on the operating and reset time, continuous current rating, make and carry for short time, breaking rate and minimum connected burden.
Page 115 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.12.1.2 Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision The power outputs PO3 and PO4 are double-pole normally open/form A power outputs with trip circuit supervision. When the two poles of the contacts are connected in series, they have the same technical specification as PO1 for breaking duty.
Page 116 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 38: Signal/trip output contact SO3 The signal/trip output contact is included in the module RTD0002 located in slot X130 of the protection relay. 3.12.1.4 Dual single-pole high-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 are dual parallel connected, single-pole, normally open/form A high-speed power outputs.
Page 117: Signal Output Contacts
1MRS757644 H Basic functions High-speed power contacts are part of the card BIO0007 with eight binary inputs and three HSOs. They are optional alternatives to conventional BIO cards of the protection relay. 3.12.2 Signal output contacts Signal output contacts are single-pole, single (normally open/form A or change- over/form C) signal output contacts (SO1, SO2,...) or parallel connected dual contacts.
Page 118 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H X100 X100 Figure 41: Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module 3.12.2.3 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in RTD0002 The signal ouputs SO1 and SO2 (single contact/change-over /form C) are included in the RTD0002 module. X130 Figure 42: Signal output in RTD0002 3.12.2.4...
Page 119: Rtd/Ma Inputs
1MRS757644 H Basic functions X110 X110 Figure 43: Signal output in BIO0005 3.13 RTD/mA inputs 3.13.1 Functionality The RTD and mA analog input module is used for monitoring and metering current (mA), temperature (°C) and resistance (Ω). Each input can be linearly scaled for various applications, for example, transformer’s tap changer position indication.
Page 120 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.13.2.1 Selection of input signal type The function module inputs accept current or resistance type signals. The inputs are Input mode configured for a particular type of input type by the channel-specific setting. The default value for all inputs is “Not in use”, which means that the channel is not sampled at all, and the output value quality is set accordingly.
Page 121 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.13.2.3 Input linear scaling Each RTD/mA input can be scaled linearly by the construction of a linear output function in respect to the input. The curve consists of two points, where the y-axis Input minimum and Input maximum ) defines the input range and the x-axis ( Value minimum and Value maximum ) is the range of the scaled value of the input.
Page 122 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.13.2.5 Self-supervision Each input sample is validated before it is fed into the filter algorithm. The samples are validated by measuring an internally set reference current immediately after the inputs are sampled. Each RTD sensor type has expected current based on the sensor type.
Page 123 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 54: Settings for RTD analog input limit value supervision Function Settings for limit value supervision RTD analog input Out of range Value maximum High-high limit Val high high limit High limit Val high limit Low limit Val low limit Low-low limit Val low low limit...
Page 124 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Example of RTD analog input deadband supervision Temperature sensor Pt100 is used in the temperature range of 15...180 °C. Value unit “Degrees Celsius” is used and the set values Value minimum and Value maximum are set to 15 and 180, respectively. Value deadband = 7500 (7.5% of the total measuring range 165) AI_VAL# = AI_DB# = 85 If AI_VAL# changes to 90, the reporting delay is:...
Page 125 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Platinum TCR 0.00385 Nickel TCR 0.00618 Copper Temp °C 0.00427 Pt 100 Pt 250 Ni 100 Ni 120 Ni 250 Cu 10 123.24 308.1 135.3 162.36 338.25 11.352 127.07 317.675 141.7 170.04 354.25 130.89 327.225 148.3 177.96 370.75 12.124...
Page 126 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H X110 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 Figure 47: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 3-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card X110 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 Figure 48: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 127 1MRS757644 H Basic functions X110 Sensor Shunt Transducer (44 Ω) Figure 49: mA wiring connection for 6RTD/2mA card 2RTD/1mA card This type of card accepts one milliampere input, two inputs from RTD sensors and five inputs from VTs. The Input 1 is assigned for current measurements, inputs 2 and 3 are for RTD sensors and inputs 4 to 8 are used for measuring input data from 2RTD/1mA/3SO card has one milliampere input, two inputs from RTD sensors and three signal outputs.
Page 128: Signals
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H X130 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 Figure 51: Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection for RTD/mA card X130 Sensor Shunt Transducer (44 Ω) Figure 52: mA wiring connection for RTD/mA card 3.13.3 Signals Table 57: 6RTD/2mA analog output signals Name...
Page 129: Rtd Input Settings
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Name Type Description AI_VAL3 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 5-6-11c, instantaneous value AI_VAL4 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 7-8-11c, instantaneous value AI_VAL5 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 9-10-11c, instantaneous value AI_VAL6 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 13-14-12c, instantaneous val- AI_VAL7 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 15-16-12c, instantaneous val-...
Page 130: Monitored Data
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Value unit 1=Dimension- Selected unit for output value for- 1=Dimension- less less 5=Ampere 23=Degrees cel- sius 30=Ohm Value maximum -10000.0...1000 10000.0 Maximum output value for scaling and supervision Value minimum -10000.0...1000 -10000.0 Minimum output value for scaling...
Page 131 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.13.5 Monitored data Table 61: 6RTD/2mA monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description AI_DB1 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000. mA input, Con- nectors 1-2, re- ported value AI_RANGE1 Enum mA input, Con- 0=normal nectors 1-2, 1=high range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low AI_DB2...
Page 132 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description AI_RANGE5 Enum RTD input, Con- 0=normal nectors 9-10-11c, 1=high range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low AI_DB6 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000. RTD input, Connectors 13-14-12c, repor- ted value AI_RANGE6 Enum RTD input, 0=normal Connectors 1=high 13-14-12c, range 2=low 3=high-high...
Page 133: Smv Function Blocks
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 62: 2RTD/1mA monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description AI_DB1 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000. mA input, Con- nectors 1-2, re- ported value AI_RANGE1 Enum mA input, Con- 0=normal nectors 1-2, 1=high range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low AI_DB2 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000.
Page 134 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Operation setting value “off”. If the SMVSENDER can be disabled with the SMVSENDER is disabled from the LHMI, it can only be enabled from the LHMI. When disabled, the sending of the samples values is disabled. 3.14.1.2 Settings Table 63: SMVSENDER Settings...
Page 135: Iec 61850-9-2 Le Sampled Values Receiving Smvrcv
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.14.2 IEC 61850-9-2 LE sampled values receiving SMVRCV 3.14.2.1 Function block Figure 53: Function block 3.14.2.2 Functionality The SMVRCV function block is used for activating the SMV receiving functionality. 3.14.2.3 Signals Table 64: SMVRCV Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 136 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H The typical additional operate time increase is +2 ms for all the receiver application functions (using either local or remote samples) when SMV is used. 3.14.3.3 Operation principle The ALARM in the receiver is activated if the synchronization accuracy of the sender or the receiver is either unknown or worse than 8 ms.
Page 137 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 66: ULTVTR Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm WARNING BOOLEAN Warning 3.14.3.5 Settings Table 67: ULTVTR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Primary voltage 0.100...440.000 0.001 20.000 Primary rated volt- Secondary voltage 60...210 Secondary rated...
Page 138: Restvtr Function Block
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.14.4 RESTVTR function block 3.14.4.1 Function block Figure 55: Function block 3.14.4.2 Functionality The RESTVTR function is used in the receiver application to perform the supervision for the sampled values of analog residual voltage and to connect the received analog residual voltage input to the application.
Page 139: Goose Function Blocks
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.14.4.4 Signals Table 68: RESTVTR Input signals Name Type Default Description INT32-UL0 IEC61850-9-2 residual voltage Table 69: RESTVTR Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm WARNING BOOLEAN Warning 3.14.4.5 Settings Table 70: RESTVTR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 140: Goosercv_Bin Function Block
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H The OUT output passes the received GOOSE value for the application. Default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status. The IN input is defined in the GOOSE configuration and can always be seen in SMT sheet. Settings The GOOSE function blocks do not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.
Page 141: Goosercv_Mv Function Block
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.15.2.3 Signals Table 72: GOOSERCV_DP Output signals Name Type Description Dbpos Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3.15.3 GOOSERCV_MV function block 3.15.3.1 Function block Figure 58: Function block 3.15.3.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_MV function is used to connect the GOOSE measured value inputs to the application.
Page 142: Goosercv_Int8 Function Block
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.15.4 GOOSERCV_INT8 function block 3.15.4.1 Function block Figure 59: Function block 3.15.4.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_INT8 function is used to connect the GOOSE 8 bit integer inputs to the application. 3.15.4.3 Signals Table 74: GOOSERCV_INT8 Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 143: Goosercv_Cmv Function Block
1MRS757644 H Basic functions The CL output signal indicates that the position is closed. Default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status. The OK output signal indicates that the position is neither in faulty or intermediate state. The default value (0) is used if VALID output indicates invalid status. 3.15.5.3 Signals Table 75: GOOSERCV_INTL Output signals...
Page 144: Goosercv_Enum Function Block
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.15.7 GOOSERCV_ENUM function block 3.15.7.1 Function block Figure 62: Function block 3.15.7.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_ENUM function block is used to connect GOOSE enumerator inputs to the application. 3.15.7.3 Signals Table 77: GOOSERCV_ENUM Output signals Name Type Description Enum Output signal...
Page 145: Type Conversion Function Blocks
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.15.8.3 Signals Table 78: GOOSERCV_INT32 Output signals Name Type Description INT32 Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3.16 Type conversion function blocks 3.16.1 QTY_GOOD function block 3.16.1.1 Function block Figure 64: Function block 3.16.1.2 Functionality The good signal quality function QTY_GOOD evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal for the application.
Page 146: Qty_Goose_Comm Function Block
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.16.2 QTY_BAD function block 3.16.2.1 Function block Figure 65: Function block 3.16.2.2 Functionality The bad signal quality function QTY_BAD evaluates the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal for the application. The IN input can be connected to any logic application signal (logic function output, binary input, application function output or received GOOSE signal).
Page 147: T_Health Function Block
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.16.3.2 Functionality The QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block evaluates the peer device communication status from the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal to the application. The IN input signal must be connected to the VALID signal of the GOOSE function block.
Page 148: T_F32_Int8 Function Block
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.16.4.3 Signals Table 85: T_HEALTH Input signals Name Type Default Description Input signal Table 86: T_HEALTH Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal WARNING BOOLEAN Output signal ALARM BOOLEAN Output signal 3.16.5 T_F32_INT8 function block 3.16.5.1 Function block Figure 68: Function block...
Page 149: T_Tcmd Function Block
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.16.6.1 Function block Figure 69: Function block 3.16.6.2 Functionality The T_DIR function evaluates enumerated data of the FAULT_DIR data attribute of the directional functions. T_DIR can only be used with GOOSE. The DIR input can be connected to the GOOSERCV_ENUM function block, which is receiving the LD0.<function>.Str.dirGeneral or LD0.<function>.Dir.dirGeneral data attribute sent by another device.
Page 150: T_Tcmd_Bin Function Block
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.16.7.2 Functionality The T_TCMD function is used to convert enumerated input signal to Boolean output signals. Table 91: Conversion from enumerated to Boolean RAISE LOWER FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE 3.16.7.3 Signals Table 92: T_TCMD input signals Name Type Default...
Page 151: T_Bin_Tcmd Function Block
1MRS757644 H Basic functions RAISE LOWER TRUE FALSE FALSE FALSE 3.16.8.3 Signals Table 95: T_TCMD_BIN input signals Name Type Default Description INT32 Input signal Table 96: T_TCMD_BIN output signals Name Type Description RAISE BOOLEAN Raise command LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command 3.16.9 T_BIN_TCMD function block 3.16.9.1...
Page 152: Configurable Logic Blocks
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.16.9.3 Signals Table 98: T_BIN_TCMD input signals Name Type Default Description RAISE BOOLEAN Raise command LOWER BOOLEAN Lower command Table 99: T_BIN_TCMD output signals Name Type Description INT32 Output signal 3.17 Configurable logic blocks 3.17.1 Standard configurable logic blocks 3.17.1.1 OR function block Function block...
Page 153 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Functionality OR, OR6 and OR20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables The O output is activated when at least one input has the value TRUE. The default value of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.
Page 154 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal 16 BOOLEAN Input signal 17 BOOLEAN Input signal 18 BOOLEAN Input signal 19 BOOLEAN Input signal 20 Table 103: OR Output signal Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal Table 104: OR6 Output signal Name Type Description...
Page 155 1MRS757644 H Basic functions AND Function block Figure 74: Function blocks Functionality AND, AND6 and AND20 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables. The default value in all inputs is logical true, which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.
Page 156 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 108: AND20 Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal 1 BOOLEAN Input signal 2 BOOLEAN Input signal 3 BOOLEAN Input signal 4 BOOLEAN Input signal 5 BOOLEAN Input signal 6 BOOLEAN Input signal 7 BOOLEAN Input signal 8 BOOLEAN...
Page 157 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Function block Figure 75: Function block Functionality The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables. The output signal is TRUE if the input signals are different and FALSE if they are equal.
Page 158 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Signals Table 114: NOT Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN Input signal Table 115: NOT Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600. 3.17.1.5 MAX3 function block Function block...
Page 159 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.1.6 MIN3 function block Function block Figure 78: Function block Functionality The minimum function MIN3 selects the minimum value from three analog values. Disconnected inputs and inputs whose quality is bad are ignored. If all inputs are disconnected or the quality is bad, MIN3 output value is set to 2^21.
Page 160 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H R_TRIG detects the transition from FALSE to TRUE at the CLK input. When the rising edge is detected, the element assigns the output to TRUE. At the next execution round, the output is returned to FALSE despite the state of the input. Signals Table 120: R_TRIG Input signals Name...
Page 161 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600. 3.17.1.9 T_POS_XX function blocks Function block Figure 81: Function blocks Functionality The circuit breaker position information can be communicated with the IEC 61850 GOOSE messages.
Page 162 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 128: T_POS_CL Output signal Name Type Description CLOSE BOOLEAN Output signal Table 129: T_POS_OP Output signal Name Type Description OPEN BOOLEAN Output signal Table 130: T_POS_OK Output signal Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or PCM600.
Page 163 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 132: SWITCHR Output signals Name Type Description REAL Real switch output 3.17.1.11 SWITCHI32 function block Function block Figure 83: Function block Functionality SWITCHI32 switching block for 32-bit integer data type is operated by the CTL_SW input, which selects the output value OUT between the IN1 and IN2 inputs.
Page 164 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Functionality The SR flip-flop output Q can be set or reset from the S or R inputs. S input has a higher priority over the R input. Output NOTQ is the negation of output Q. The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile memory.
Page 165: Minimum Pulse Timer
1MRS757644 H Basic functions The statuses of outputs Q and NOTQ are not retained in the nonvolatile memory. Table 139: Truth table for RS flip-flop Signals Table 140: RS Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q output when BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q output...
Page 166 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Function block Figure 86: Function block Functionality The Minimum pulse timer function TPGAPC contains two independent timers. The function has a settable pulse length (in milliseconds). The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs. Once the input is Pulse time setting.
Page 167 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Technical revision history Table 146: TPGAPC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Outputs now visible in menu Internal improvement 3.17.2.2 Minimum pulse timer TPSGAPC Function block Figure 88: Function block Functionality The Minimum second pulse timer function TPSGAPC contains two independent timers.
Page 168 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 149: TPSGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse time 0...300 Minimum pulse time Technical revision history Table 150: TPSGAPC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Outputs now visible in menu Internal improvement 3.17.2.3 Minimum pulse timer TPMGAPC...
Page 169: Pulse Timer Function Block Ptgapc
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 152: TPMGAPC Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status Settings Table 153: TPMGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse time 0...300 Minimum pulse time 3.17.3...
Page 170 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.17.3.3 Signals Table 154: PTGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 1 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 2 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 3 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 4 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 status...
Page 171: Time Delay Off (8 Pcs) Tofgapc
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.4 Time delay off (8 pcs) TOFGAPC 3.17.4.1 Function block Figure 94: Function block 3.17.4.2 Functionality The time delay off (8 pcs) function TOFGAPC can be used, for example, for a dropoff-delayed output related to the input signal. The function contains eight independent timers.
Page 172: Time Delay On (8 Pcs) Tongapc
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 159: TOFGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 status BOOLEAN Output 2 status BOOLEAN Output 3 status BOOLEAN Output 4 status BOOLEAN Output 5 status BOOLEAN Output 6 status BOOLEAN Output 7 status BOOLEAN Output 8 status 3.17.4.4...
Page 173 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.5.1 Function block Figure 96: Function block 3.17.5.2 Functionality The time delay on (8 pcs) function TONGAPC can be used, for example, for time delaying the output related to the input signal. TONGAPC contains eight independent timers. The timer has a settable time delay. Once the input is On delay time setting has activated, the output is set after the time set by the elapsed.
Page 174: Set-Reset (8 Pcs) Srgapc
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 163: TONGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 BOOLEAN Output 2 BOOLEAN Output 3 BOOLEAN Output 4 BOOLEAN Output 5 BOOLEAN Output 6 BOOLEAN Output 7 BOOLEAN Output 8 3.17.5.4 Settings Table 164: TONGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 175 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.6.1 Function block Figure 98: Function block 3.17.6.2 Functionality The set-reset (8 pcs) function SRGAPC is a simple SR flip-flop with a memory that can be set or that can reset an output from the S# or R# inputs, respectively. The function contains eight independent set-reset flip-flop latches where the SET input has the higher priority over the RESET input.
Page 176 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q2 output when BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q2 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q3 output when BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q3 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q4 output when BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q4 output...
Page 177: Move (8 Pcs) Mvgapc
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 169: SRGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset Q1 0=Cancel Resets Q1 output 0=Cancel when set 1=Reset Reset Q2 0=Cancel Resets Q2 output 0=Cancel when set 1=Reset Reset Q3 0=Cancel Resets Q3 output 0=Cancel...
Page 178: Integer Value Move Mvi4Gapc
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.17.7.3 Signals Table 170: MVGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False IN1 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN2 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN3 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN4 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN5 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN6 status BOOLEAN 0=False IN7 status BOOLEAN...
Page 179: Analog Value Scaling Sca4Gapc
1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.8.1 Function block MVI4GAPC OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 Figure 100: Function block 3.17.8.2 Functionality The integer value move function MVI4GAPC is used for creation of the events from the integer values. The integer input value is received via IN1...4 input. The integer output value is available on OUT1...4 output.
Page 180 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.17.9.1 Function block SCA4GAPC AI1_VALUE AO1_VALUE AI2_VALUE AO2_VALUE AI3_VALUE AO3_VALUE AI4_VALUE AO4_VALUE Figure 101: Function block 3.17.9.2 Functionality The analog value scaling function SCA4GAPC is used for scaling the analog value. It allows creating events from analog values. Scale ratio n The analog value received via the AIn_VALUE input is scaled with the setting.
Page 181 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 176: SCA4GAPC Output signals Name Type Description AO1_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 1 after scaling AO2_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 2 after scaling AO3_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 3 after scaling AO4_VALUE FLOAT32 Analog value 4 after scaling 3.17.9.4 Settings Table 177: SCA4GAPC settings...
Page 182: Local/Remote Control Function Block Control
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.17.10 Local/remote control function block CONTROL 3.17.10.1 Function block Figure 102: Function block 3.17.10.2 Functionality Local/Remote control is by default realized through the R/L button on the front panel. The control via binary input can be enabled by setting the value of the LR control setting to "Binary input".
Page 183 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.10.3 L/R control access Four different Local/Remote control access scenarios are possible depending on the selected station authority level: “L,R”, “L,R,L+R”, “L,S,R” and “L, S, S+R, L+S, L+S+R”. If control commands need to be allowed from multiple levels, multilevel access can be used.
Page 184 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 180: Station authority “L,R” using CONTROL function block L/R control L/R control status Control access Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client CTRL.LLN0.LocKey CTRL_OFF FALSE CTRL_LOC FALSE CTRL_STA FALSE CTRL_REM FALSE CTRL_ALL FALSE...
Page 185 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 182: Station authority “L,R,L+R” using CONTROL function block L/R Control L/R Control status Control access Control FB input CTRL.LLN0.LocSta CTRL.LLN0.MltLev L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client CTRL.LLN0.LocKey CTRL_OFF FALSE CTRL_LOC FALSE CTRL_STA FALSE CTRL_REM FALSE CTRL_ALL TRUE...
Page 186 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 183: Station authority level “L,S,R” using R/L button L/R Control L/R Control status Control access R/L button CTRL.LLN0.Loc CTRL.LLN0.MltL L/R state Local user IEC 61850 client IEC 61850 CTRL.LLN0.Loc client KeyHMI Local FALSE FALSE Remote FALSE FALSE Remote...
Page 187 1MRS757644 H Basic functions CTRL.LLN0.LocSta and CONTROL function block input CTRL_STA are applicable for this station authority level. “Station” and “Local + Station” control access can be reserved by using R/L button or CONTROL function block in combination with IEC 61850 data object CTRL.LLN0.LocSta.
Page 188 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 188: CONTROL Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Control output OFF LOCAL BOOLEAN Control output Local STATION BOOLEAN Control output Station REMOTE BOOLEAN Control output Remote BOOLEAN Control output All BEH_BLK BOOLEAN Logical device CTRL block status BEH_TST BOOLEAN Logical device CTRL test status...
Page 189 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.10.10 Monitored data Table 190: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Command Enum Latest command re- 0=No commands response sponse 1=Select open 2=Select close 3=Operate open 4=Operate close 5=Direct open 6=Direct close 7=Cancel 8=Position reached 9=Position timeout 10=Object status only 11=Object direct...
Page 190: Generic Control Point (16 Pcs) Spcgapc
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description LR state Enum LR state monitoring 0=Off 1=Local 2=Remote 3=Station 4=L+R 5=L+S 6=L+S+R 7=S+R 3.17.11 Generic control point (16 pcs) SPCGAPC 3.17.11.1 Function block Figure 107: Function block 3.17.11.2 Functionality The generic control point (16 pcs) function SPCGAPC can be used in combination with other function blocks such as FKEYGGIO.
Page 191 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Figure 108: Operation in "Toggle" mode From the remote communication point of view SPCGAPC toggled operation mode is always working as persistent mode. The output O# follows the value written to the input IN#. 3.17.11.3 Signals Table 191: SPCGAPC Input signals Name Type...
Page 192 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description IN14 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point IN15 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point IN16 BOOLEAN 0=False Input of control point Table 192: SPCGAPC Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 status BOOLEAN Output 2 status BOOLEAN...
Page 193 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.11.4 Settings Table 193: SPCGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Loc Rem restriction 1=True Local remote switch restriction 0=False 1=True Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length...
Page 194 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 8 Generic control point description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con-...
Page 195: Remote Generic Control Points Spcrgapc
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGAPC1 Output 16 Generic control point description 3.17.12 Remote generic control points SPCRGAPC 3.17.12.1...
Page 196 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Description setting can be used for storing signal names for each output. Each control point or SPCRGAPC can only be accessed remotely through communication. SPCRGAPC follows the local or remote (L/R) state if the setting Loc Rem restriction is "true". If the Loc Rem restriction setting is "false", local or remote (L/R) state is ignored, that is, all controls are allowed regardless of the local or remote state.
Page 197 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.12.5 Settings Table 196: SPCRGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Loc Rem restriction 1=True Local remote switch restriction 0=False 1=True Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length...
Page 198 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Output 8 Generic control point description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con-...
Page 199: Local Generic Control Points Spclgapc
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Description SPCRGAPC1 Output Generic control point description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGAPC1 Output...
Page 200 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H active for the duration of the set pulse length. When activated, the additional activation command does not extend the length of pulse. Thus, the pulse needs to be ended before the new activation can occur. Description setting can be used for storing signal names for each output. Each control point or SPCLGAPC can only be accessed through the LHMI control.
Page 201 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.13.5 Settings Table 199: SPCLGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Loc Rem restriction 1=True Local remote switch restriction 0=False 1=True Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length...
Page 202 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Output 8 Generic control point description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con-...
Page 203: Programmable Buttons Fkeyggio
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Description SPCLGAPC1 Output Generic control point description Operation mode -1=Off Operation mode for generic con- 0=Pulsed trol point 1=Toggle/Persistent -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGAPC1 Output...
Page 204: Generic Up-Down Counter Udfcnt
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.17.14.4 Signals Table 200: FKEYGGIO Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False LED 1 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 2 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 3 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 4 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 5 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 6 BOOLEAN 0=False LED 7 BOOLEAN...
Page 205 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.17.15 Generic up-down counter UDFCNT 3.17.15.1 Function block Figure 112: Function block 3.17.15.2 Functionality The generic up-down counter function UDFCNT counts up or down for each positive edge of the corresponding inputs. The counter value output can be reset to zero or preset to some other value if required.
Page 206 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H The function also provides status outputs UPCNT_STS and DNCNT_STS. The UPCNT_STS is set to "True" when the CNT_VAL is greater than or equal to the setting Counter load value . DNCNT_STS is set to "True" when the CNT_VAL is zero. The RESET input is used for resetting the function.
Page 207: Factory Settings Restoration
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 204: UDFCNT Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Counter load value 0...2147483647 10000 Preset counter val- Reset counter 0=Cancel Resets counter val- 0=Cancel 1=Reset Load counter...
Page 208 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H nonvolatile memory. The value range for the recorded load quantities is about eight times the nominal value, and values larger than that saturate. The recording time depends on a settable demand interval parameter and the amount of quantities selected.
Page 209 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Table 207 . When the recording buffer is fully occupied, the oldest data are overwritten by the newest data. Table 207: Recording capability in days with different settings Demand interval minute minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes minutes Amount of quantities...
Page 210: Configuration
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 192 . 168 . L D P 1 L D P 1 . C F G L D P 1 . D A T Figure 115: Load profile record file naming 3.19.2.4 Clearing of record Reset load profile rec via HMI, The load profile record can be cleared with communication or the ACT input in PCM600.
Page 211: Signals
1MRS757644 H Basic functions the protection relay. The levels for MEM_WARN and MEM_ALARM are set by two Mem.warn level and Mem. Alarm level . parameters 3.19.4 Signals Table 208: LDPRLRC Output signals Name Type Description MEM_WARN BOOLEAN Recording memory warning status MEM_ALARM BOOLEAN...
Page 212 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 209: LDPRLRC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Quantity Sel 1 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B...
Page 213 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 45=PL2B 46=PL3B 47=QL1B 48=QL2B 49=QL3B 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 214 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 2 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 215 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 216 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 3 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 217 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 218 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 4 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 219 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 220 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 5 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 221 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 222 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 6 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 223 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 224 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 7 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 225 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 226 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 8 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 227 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 228 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 9 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 229 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 230 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 10 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 231 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 232 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 11 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 233 1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Table continues on the next page 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 234 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Quantity Sel 12 0=Disabled Select quantity to 0=Disabled be recorded 1=IL1 2=IL2 3=IL3 4=Io 5=IL1B 6=IL2B 7=IL3B 8=IoB 9=U12 10=U23 11=U31 12=UL1 13=UL2 14=UL3 15=U12B 16=U23B 17=U31B 18=UL1B 19=UL2B 20=UL3B 21=S 22=P...
Page 235: Monitored Data
1MRS757644 H Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description 50=PFL1B 51=PFL2B 52=PFL3B 53=IL1C 54=IL2C 55=IL3C Mem. warning level 0...100 Set memory warn- ing level Mem. alarm level 0...100 Set memory alarm level 3.19.6 Monitored data Table 210: LDPRLRC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 236: Ethernet Channel Supervision Schlcch
Basic functions 1MRS757644 H 3.20.1.3 Signals Table 211: RCHLCCH output signals Parameter Values Unit Step Defaul Description (Range) CHLIV Status of redundant Ethernet chan- True Redundant mode nel LAN A. When False is set to "HSR" or "PRP", value is "True"...
Page 237 1MRS757644 H Basic functions 3.20.2.1 Function block Figure 117: Function block 3.20.2.2 Functionality Ethernet channel supervision SCHLCCH represents X1/LAN, X2/LAN and X3/LAN Ethernet channels. An unused Ethernet port can be set "Off" with the setting Configuration > Communication > Ethernet > Rear port(s) > Port x Mode. This setting closes the port from software, disabling the Ethernet communication in that port.
Page 238 Basic functions 1MRS757644 H Table 215: SCHLCCH3 output signals Parameter Values Unit Step Defaul Description (Range) CH3LIV Status of Ethernet channel X3/LAN. True Value is "True" if the port is receiv- False ing Ethernet frames. Valid only when Redundant mode is set to "None" or port is not one of the redundant ports (LAN A or LAN B).
Page 239: Protection Functions
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Protection functions Three-phase current protection 4.1.1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection PHxPTOC 4.1.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase non-directional over- PHLPTOC 3I> 51P-1 current protection, low stage Three-phase non-directional over- PHHPTOC 3I>>...
Page 240 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer characteristics. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.
Page 241 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 120: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase Num of start phases setting, the phase selection logic information matches the activates the timer module.
Page 242 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed. The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off situation.
Page 243 IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are Operating curve applicable.
Page 244 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 219: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type PHLPTOC PHHPTOC Note (1) Immediate Available for all operate time curves (2) Def time re- Available for all operate time curves (3) Inverse reset Available only for ANSI and user programmable curves Type of reset curve setting does not apply to PHIPTOC or when the...
Page 245 1MRS757644 H Protection functions , depending on the impedance of the transformer and the source impedance of the feeding network. From this point of view, it is clear that the operation must be both very fast and selective, which is usually achieved by using coarse current settings. The purpose is also to protect the transformer from short circuits occurring outside the protection zone, that is through-faults.
Page 246 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Transformer and busbar overcurrent protection with reverse blocking principle By implementing a full set of overcurrent protection stages and blocking channels between the protection stages of the incoming feeders, bus-tie and outgoing feeders, it is possible to speed up the operation of overcurrent protection in the busbar and transformer LV-side faults without impairing the selectivity.
Page 247 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 122: Numerical overcurrent protection functionality for a typical sub- transmission/distribution substation (feeder protection not shown). Blocking output = digital output signal from the start of a protection stage, Blocking in = digital input signal to block the operation of a protection stage The operating times of the time selective stages are very short, because the grading margins between successive protection stages can be kept short.
Page 248 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H In many cases the above requirements can be best fulfilled by using multiple-stage Figure 123 overcurrent units. shows an example of this. A brief coordination study has been carried out between the incoming and outgoing feeders. The protection scheme is implemented with three-stage numerical overcurrent protection, where the low-set stage PHLPTOC operates in IDMT-mode and the two higher stages PHHPTOC and PHIPTOC in DT-mode.
Page 249 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 124: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection 4.1.1.8 Signals Table 221: PHLPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT...
Page 250 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 223: PHIPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for cur- rent multiplier Table 224: PHLPTOC Output signals Name...
Page 251 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate delay time 40...200000 Operate delay time Operating curve 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time 1=ANSI Ext. inv. type delay curve type 2=ANSI Very inv. 3=ANSI Norm. inv. 4=ANSI Mod. inv. 5=ANSI Def.
Page 252 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 230: PHLPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate 20...60000 Minimum operate time time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement 2=DFT Selects used meas- 1=RMS mode urement mode...
Page 253 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer program- mable curve Table 234: PHHPTOC Non group settings (Advanced)
Page 254 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.1.1.10 Monitored data Table 238: PHLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time PHLPTOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 239: PHHPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 255 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Characteristic Value PHIPTOC: 16 ms 19 ms 23 ms Start value = 2 × set Fault 11 ms 12 ms 14 ms Start value = 10 × set Fault PHHPTOC and PHLPTOC: 23 ms 26 ms 29 ms = 2 ×...
Page 256: Three-Independent-Phase Non-Directional Overcurrent Protection Ph3Xptoc
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 244: PHLPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Minimum and default values changed to 40 Operate delay time setting ms for the Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the Time multiplier setting Internal improvement Internal improvement 4.1.2 Three-independent-phase non-directional overcurrent...
Page 257 1MRS757644 H Protection functions In the DT mode, the function operates after a predefined operate time and resets when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer characteristics. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.
Page 258 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Start of the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the value setting is multiplied by the Start value Mult setting. Start value or Start value Mult setting if the The IED does not accept the Start value setting range.
Page 259 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 128: Logic diagram for phase selection module When the Number of start phases setting is set to "1 out of 3" and the fault is in one or several phases, the phase selection logic sends an enabling signal to the faulty phase timers.
Page 260 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Operate delay time in the IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated. When the programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operating time characteristics Curve parameter A , Curve parameter B , Curve are defined with the parameters parameter C , Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E .
Page 261 IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition, a programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable.
Page 262 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 246: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC Note (1) Immediate Available for all operating time curves (2) Def time re- Available for all operating time curves (3) Inverse reset Available only for ANSI and user programmable curves Type of reset curve setting does not apply to PH3IPTOC or when the...
Page 263 1MRS757644 H Protection functions operation must be both very fast and selective, which is usually achieved by using coarse current settings. The purpose is also to protect the transformer from short circuits occurring outside the protection zone, that is, from through-faults. Transformer overcurrent protection also provides protection for the LV-side busbars.
Page 264 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Transformer and busbar overcurrent protection with reverse blocking principle By implementing a full set of overcurrent protection stages and blocking channels between the protection stages of the incoming feeders, bus-tie and outgoing feeders, it is possible to accelerate the operation of the overcurrent protection in the busbar and transformer LV-side faults without impairing the selectivity.
Page 265 1MRS757644 H Protection functions PH3LPTOC PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC PH3HPTOC PH3IPTOC PH3IPTOC CCBRBRF CCBRBRF HV-side HV-side INRPHAR INRPHAR Blocking output Blocking output (PH3HPTOC (PH3HPTOC START) START) PH3LPTOC PH3LPTOC LV-side LV-side PH3HPTOC PH3HPTOC PH3IPTOC PH3IPTOC CCBRBRF CCBRBRF MEASUREMENT MEASUREMENT INCOMING INCOMING PH3LPTOC PH3HPTOC PH3IPTOC CCBRBRF Blocking output...
Page 266 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H levels along the protected line, selectivity requirements, inrush currents and the thermal and mechanical withstand of the lines to be protected. Often the above requirements can be best fulfilled using multiple-stage overcurrent Figure 131 units. shows an example of this. A brief coordination study has been carried out between the incoming and outgoing feeders.
Page 267 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 132 coordination plan. In , the coordination plan shows an example of operation characteristics in the LV-side incoming feeder and radial outgoing feeder. Figure 132: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection 4.1.2.7 Signals Table 248: PH3LPTOC Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 268 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 250: PH3IPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for cur- rent multiplier Table 251: PH3LPTOC Output signals Name...
Page 269 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Description OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C START BOOLEAN Start ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C 4.1.2.8 Settings Table 254: PH3LPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default...
Page 270 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 256: PH3LPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Num of start pha- 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases 1=1 out of 3 required for oper- 2=2 out of 3 ate activation...
Page 271 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 259: PH3HPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Table 260: PH3HPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 272 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 263: PH3IPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Num of start pha- 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases 1=1 out of 3 required for oper- 2=2 out of 3 ate activation...
Page 273: Three-Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection Dphxpdoc
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.2.10 Technical data Table 268: PH3xPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 PH3LPTOC ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I PH3HPTOC and PH3IPTOC ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 ×...
Page 274 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.1.3.2 Function block Figure 133: Function block 4.1.3.3 Functionality The three-phase directional overcurrent protection function DPHxPDOC is used as one-phase, two-phase or three-phase directional overcurrent and short-circuit protection for feeders. DPHxPDOC starts up when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and directional criterion is fulfilled.
Page 275 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 134: Functional module diagram Directional calculation The directional calculation compares the current phasors to the polarizing phasor. A suitable polarization quantity can be selected from the different polarization quantities, which are the positive sequence voltage, negative sequence voltage, self-polarizing (faulted) voltage and cross-polarizing voltages (healthy voltages).
Page 276 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Characteristic opposite direction are seen in the non-operating zone. The value of angle depends on the network configuration. Reliable operation requires both the operating and polarizing quantities to exceed certain minimum amplitude levels. The minimum amplitude level for the operating Min operate current setting.
Page 277 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 135: Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels Level detector Start value . If the The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value , the level detector reports the exceeding measured value exceeds the set Start of the value to the phase selection logic.
Page 278 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 136: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector and the directional calculation, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured Num of start current exceeds the setting.
Page 279 1MRS757644 H Protection functions reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed. The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off situation.
Page 280 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.1.3.6 Directional overcurrent characteristics The forward and reverse sectors are defined separately. The forward operation area Min forward angle and Max forward angle settings. The reverse is limited with the Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle settings. operation area is limited with the The sector limits are always given as positive degree values.
Page 281 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 271: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sectors, or the direc- 0 = unknown tion cannot be defined due too low amplitude The ANGLE_X is in the forward sector 1 = forward...
Page 282 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 138: Single-phase earth fault, phase A In an example case of a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U and operating quantity I in the self-polarizing method.
Page 283 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity Table 274: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method Faulted Used Used Angle difference phases fault polarizing current voltage ANGLE A ϕ ϕ ϕ ANGLE B ϕ ϕ ϕ ANGLE C ϕ...
Page 284 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 141: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counter- clockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is reversed, 180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference. This is done Phase rotation .
Page 285 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 142: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phases A-N, and two-phase short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing quantity is the negative- sequence voltage -U2 Positive sequence voltage as polarizing quantity Table 275: Equations for calculating angle difference for positive-sequence quan- tity polarizing method Faulted Used...
Page 286 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H -90° Figure 143: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phase A to ground, and a two- phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage U 1 Network rotation direction Typically, the network rotating direction is counter-clockwise and defined as "ABC".
Page 287 1MRS757644 H Protection functions NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB Figure 144: Examples of network rotating direction 4.1.3.7 Application DPHxPDOC is used as short-circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub transmission networks operating at 50 or 60 Hz. In radial networks, phase overcurrent protection relays are often sufficient for the short circuit protection of lines, transformers and other equipment.
Page 288 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 145: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional protection relays DPHxPDOC can be used for parallel operating transformer applications. In these applications, there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LV- side up to the HV-side.
Page 289 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 147: Closed ring network topology where feeding lines are protected with directional overcurrent protection relays 4.1.3.8 Signals Table 276: DPHLPDOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Negative phase se-...
Page 290 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Negative phase se- quence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enabling signal for current multiplier NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional Table 277: DPHHPDOC Input signals Name Type...
Page 291 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 279: DPHHPDOC Output signals Name Type Description START BOOLEAN Start OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate 4.1.3.9 Settings Table 280: DPHLPDOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...5.00 0.01 0.05 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scal-...
Page 292 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 281: DPHLPDOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Voltage Mem time 0...3000 Voltage memory time Pol quantity 5=Cross pol Reference quantity...
Page 293 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min operate cur- 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating rent current Min operate volt- 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage Table 284: DPHHPDOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description...
Page 294 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 286: DPHHPDOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for...
Page 295 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.3.10 Monitored data Table 288: DPHLPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time FAULT_DIR Enum Detected fault 0=unknown direction 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIRECTION Enum Direction infor- 0=unknown mation 1=forward...
Page 296 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description VMEM_USED BOOLEAN Voltage memory 0=False in use status 1=True DPHLPDOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 289: DPHHPDOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate...
Page 297 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle difference, Phase ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle difference, Phase ANGLE_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle difference, Phase VMEM_USED BOOLEAN Voltage memory 0=False in use status 1=True DPHHPDOC Enum Status...
Page 298: Directional Three-Independent-Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection Dph3Xpdoc
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Characteristic Value Retardation time <35 ms Operate time accuracy in ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms definite time mode Operate time accuracy in in- ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms verse time mode Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 299 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.4.2 Function block Figure 148: Function block 4.1.4.3 Functionality Directional three-independent-phase directional overcurrent protection function DPH3xPDOC is used as one-phase, two-phase or three-phase directional overcurrent and short circuit protection for feeders. DPH3xPDOC starts when the value of the current exceeds the set limit and directional criterion is fulfilled.
Page 300 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 149: Functional module diagram Directional calculation The directional calculation compares the current phasors to the polarizing phasor. A suitable polarization quantity can be selected from the different polarization quantities, which are the positive-sequence voltage, negative-sequence voltage, self-polarizing (faulted) voltage and cross-polarizing voltages (healthy voltages).
Page 301 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Characteristic opposite direction are seen in the non-operating zone. The value of angle depends on the network configuration. Reliable operation requires both the operating and polarizing quantities to exceed certain minimum amplitude levels. The minimum amplitude level for the operating Min operate current setting.
Page 302 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 150: Operating zones at minimum magnitude levels Level detector Start value . If the The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Start value ,the level detector reports the exceeding measured value exceeds the set of the value, together with the directional results of that phase, to the phase Start value setting is multiplied selection logic.
Page 303 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 151: Start value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic The phase selection logic detects the faulty phase or phases and controls the timers Num of start phases setting. according to the set value of the 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 304 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 152: Logic diagram for phase selection module Number of start phase setting is set to "1 out of 3" and the fault is in one When the or several phases, the phase selection logic sends an enabling signal to the faulty phase timers.
Page 305 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Once activated, each timer activates its START output. Depending on the value of Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Operate delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the OPERATE output is activated.
Page 306 IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of the ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are Operating curve applicable.
Page 307 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Reset curve type Supported by Note DPH3LPDOC DPH3HPDOC (1) Immediate Available for all oper- ating time curves (2) Def time reset Available for all oper- ating time curves (3) Inverse reset Available only for AN- SI and user program- mable curves 4.1.4.6 Directional overcurrent characteristics...
Page 308 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 153: Configurable operating sectors Table 295: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sectors, or the direc- 0 = unknown tion cannot be defined due too low amplitude The ANGLE_X is in the forward sector...
Page 309 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Self-polarizing as polarizing method Table 297: Equations for calculating angle difference for self-polarizing method Faulted Used Used Angle difference phases fault polarizing current voltage ANGLE A = ϕ ϕ ϕ ANGLE B = ϕ ϕ ϕ ANGLE C = ϕ...
Page 310 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 155: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity Table 298: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method Faulted Used Used Angle difference phases fault polarizing current voltage ANGLE A ϕ...
Page 311 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 156: Single-phase earth fault, phase A In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity U and operating quantity I marked as φ.
Page 312 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 157: Two-phase short circuit, short circuit is between phases B and C The equations are valid when network rotating direction is counter- clockwise, that is, ABC. If the network rotating direction is reversed, 180 degrees is added to the calculated angle difference. This is done Phase rotation .
Page 313 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 158: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phases A-N, and two-phase short circuit, phases B and C, when the actuating polarizing quantity is the negative- sequence voltage -U2 Positive sequence voltage as polarizing quantity Table 299: Equations for calculating angle difference for positive-sequence quan- tity polarizing method Faulted Used...
Page 314 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H -90° Figure 159: Phasors in a single-phase earth fault, phase A to ground, and a two- phase short circuit, phases B-C, are short-circuited when the polarizing quantity is the positive-sequence voltage U 1 Network rotation direction Typically, the network rotatiion direction is counterclockwise and defined as "ABC".
Page 315 1MRS757644 H Protection functions NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB Figure 160: Examples of network rotating direction 4.1.4.7 Application DPH3xPDOC is used as short circuit protection in three-phase distribution or sub transmission networks operating at 50 Hz. In radial networks, phase overcurrent IEDs are often sufficient for the short circuit protection of lines, transformers and other equipment.
Page 316 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 161: Overcurrent protection of parallel lines using directional protection relays DPH3xPDOC can be used for parallel operating transformer applications. In these applications, there is a possibility that the fault current can also be fed from the LVside up to the HV-side.
Page 317 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 163: Closed-ring network topology where feeding lines are protected with directional overcurrent IEDs 4.1.4.8 Signals Table 300: DPH3LPDOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Negative phase se- quence current...
Page 318 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Negative phase se- quence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enabling signal for current multiplier NON_DIR BOOLEAN 0=False Forces protection to non-directional Table 301: DPH3HPDOC Input signals Name Type...
Page 319 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Description OPR_A BOOLEAN Operate phase A OPR_B BOOLEAN Operate phase B OPR_C BOOLEAN Operate phase C ST_A BOOLEAN Start phase A ST_B BOOLEAN Start phase B ST_C BOOLEAN Start phase C Table 303: DPH3HPDOC Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 320 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operating curve 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time 1=ANSI Ext. inv. type delay curve type 2=ANSI Very inv. 3=ANSI Norm. inv. 4=ANSI Mod. inv. 5=ANSI Def. Time 6=L.T.E. inv. 7=L.T.V.
Page 321 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 306: DPH3LPDOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Num of start pha- 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases 1=1 out of 3 required for oper- 2=2 out of 3 ate activation...
Page 322 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operating curve 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time 1=ANSI Ext. inv. type delay curve type 3=ANSI Norm. inv. 5=ANSI Def. Time 9=IEC Norm. inv. 10=IEC Very inv. 12=IEC Ext. inv. 15=IEC Def.
Page 323 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer program- mable curve Num of start pha- 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases 1=1 out of 3 required for oper- 2=2 out of 3 ate activation 3=3 out of 3...
Page 324 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description DIR_A Enum Direction phase 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIR_B Enum Direction phase 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIR_C Enum Direction phase 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward 3=both ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle difference, Phase ANGLE_B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00...
Page 325 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description DIRECTION Enum Direction infor- 0=unknown mation 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIR_A Enum Direction phase 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIR_B Enum Direction phase 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIR_C Enum Direction phase 0=unknown 1=forward 2=backward 3=both...
Page 326 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.1.4.11 Technical data Table 314: DPH3xPDOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current/voltage measured: f ±2 Hz DPH3LPDOC Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Voltage: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Phase angle: ±2°...
Page 327: Three-Phase Voltage-Dependent Overcurrent Protection Phpvoc
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.5 Three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection PHPVOC 4.1.5.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase voltage-dependent PHPVOC 3I(U)> overcurrent protection 4.1.5.2 Function block Figure 164: Function block 4.1.5.3 Functionality The three-phase voltage-dependent overcurrent protection function PHPVOC is used for single-phase, two-phase or three-phase voltage-dependent time overcurrent protection of generators against overcurrent and short circuit conditions.
Page 328 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 165: Functional module diagram Effective start value calculator The normal starting current above which the overcurrent protection starts is set Start value setting. The Effective start value of the current may need through the to be changed during certain conditions like magnetizing inrush or when the terminal voltages drop due to a fault.
Page 329 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Voltage level Effective start value (I> effective) Voltage high limit Start value low U < Voltage high limit Start value U ≥ In this example, U represents the measured input voltage. This voltage step Figure 166 characteristic is graphically represented in Figure 166: Effective start value for voltage step characteristic Voltage...
Page 330 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Here U represents the measured input voltage. The voltage slope characteristic is graphically represented. Figure 167: Effective start value or voltage slope characteristic Voltage high limit must To achieve the voltage slope characteristics, always be set to a value greater than Voltage low limit .
Page 331 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Voltage and input control mode Control mode is set to "Voltage and input Ctrl", both the "Voltage control" and "Input control" modes are used. However, the “Input control” functionality is dominant over the “Voltage control” mode when ENA_U_MULT is active. No voltage dependency mode Control mode is set to "No Volt dependency", the effective start value has no When...
Page 332 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves. If another operating curve type is selected, an immediate reset occurs during the drop-off situation. Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT trip and reset times. Minimum operate time setting defines the minimum desired operating time for IDMT operation.
Page 333 1MRS757644 H Protection functions subjected. Choosing too high a value for the control voltage may allow an undesired operation of the function during wide-area disturbances. When the terminal voltage of the generator is above the control voltage value, the normal start value is used. This ensures that PHPVOC does not operate during normal overloads when the generator terminal voltages are maintained near the normal levels.
Page 334 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.1.5.7 Settings Table 317: PHPVOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...5.00 0.01 0.05 Start value Start value low 0.05...1.00 0.01 0.05 Lower start value based on voltage control Voltage high limit 0.01...1.00 0.01 1.00...
Page 335 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer program- mable curve...
Page 336: Three-Phase Thermal Protection For Feeders, Cables And Distribution Transformers T1Pttr
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description EFF_ST_VAL_C FLOAT32 0.00...50.00 Effective start value for phase C PHPVOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.1.5.9 Technical data Table 322: PHPVOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current and voltage: ±2 Hz Current:...
Page 337 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.6.2 Function block Figure 168: Function block 4.1.6.3 Functionality The increased utilization of power systems closer to the thermal limits has generated a need for a thermal overload function for power lines as well. A thermal overload is in some cases not detected by other protection functions, and the introduction of the three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and distribution transformers function T1PTTR allows the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits.
Page 338 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H START Temperature current estimator OPERATE selector Thermal ALARM counter ENA_MULT BLK_CLOSE BLK_OPR AMB_TEMP Figure 169: Functional module diagram Max current selector The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured TRMS phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the temperature estimator.
Page 339 1MRS757644 H Protection functions ∆   −   Θ Θ Θ − Θ ⋅ − τ − − final     (Equation 12) Θ calculated present temperature Θ calculated temperature at previous time step Θ calculated final temperature with actual current final Δt time step between calculation of actual temperature...
Page 340 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H In some applications, the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines. This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. Current multiplier parameter to the number of parallel lines (cables), By setting the the actual current on one line is used in the protection algorithm.
Page 341 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.6.6 Signals Table 323: T1PTTR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLK_OPR BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for oper- ate outputs ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable Current multi- plier AMB_TEMP FLOAT32...
Page 342 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 326: T1PTTR Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Current multiplier 1...5 Current multiplier when function is used for parallel lines Table 327: T1PTTR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description...
Page 343: Three-Phase Thermal Overload Protection, Two Time Constants T2Pttr
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.6.9 Technical data Table 330: T1PTTR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 ×...
Page 344 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.1.7.3 Functionality The three-phase thermal overload, two time constants, protection function T2PTTR protects the transformer mainly from short-time overloads. The transformer is protected from long-time overloads with the oil temperature detector included in its equipment. The alarm signal gives an early warning to allow the operators to take action before the transformer trips.
Page 345 1MRS757644 H Protection functions   Θ ⋅     final   (Equation 15) highest measured phase current Current reference setting the set value of the Temperature rise setting (temperature rise (°C) with the the set value of the steady-state current I The ambient temperature value is added to the calculated final temperature rise estimation.
Page 346 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H constant settings. The Short time constant setting describes the warming of the Long time constant setting describes transformer with respect to windings. The the warming of the transformer with respect to the oil. Using the two time-constant model, the protection relay is able to follow both fast and slow changes in the temperature of the protected object.
Page 347 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Env temperature Set setting is also used when the ambient temperature input. The measurement connected to T2PTTR is set to “Not in use” in the X130 (RTD) function. Initial The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the temperature and Max temperature setting parameters.
Page 348 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H influenced by the transformer cooling system. The active setting group can be changed by a parameter, or through a binary input if the binary input is enabled for it. This feature can be used for transformers where forced cooling is taken out of operation or extra cooling is switched on.
Page 349 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Max temperature setting is 105°C. This value is chosen since even The default though the IEC 60076-7 standard recommends 98°C as the maximum allowable temperature in long-time loading, the standard also states that a transformer can withstand the emergency loading for weeks or even months, which may produce the winding temperature of 140°C.
Page 350 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reclose tempera- 40.0...100.0 60.0 Temperature for re- ture set of block reclose after operate Short time con- 6...60000 Short time con- stant stant in seconds Long time constant 60...60000 7200 Long time constant in seconds...
Page 351: Motor Load Jam Protection Jamptoc
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.7.9 Technical data Table 340: T2PTTR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x I (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 x I Operate time accuracy ±2.0% of the theoretical value or ±0.50 s 4.1.7.10...
Page 352 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H passed the starting phase, JAMPTOC monitors the magnitude of phase currents. The function starts when the measured current exceeds the breakdown torque level, that is, above the set limit. The operation characteristic is definite time. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function outputs.
Page 353 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output"...
Page 354 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.1.8.7 Settings Table 344: JAMPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Start value 0.10...10.00 0.01 2.50 Start value Operate delay time 100...120000 2000 Operate delay time Table 345: JAMPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter...
Page 355: Loss Of Load Supervision Loflptuc
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.9 Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC 4.1.9.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC 3I< 4.1.9.2 Function block Figure 175: Function block 4.1.9.3 Functionality The loss of load supervision function LOFLPTUC is used to detect a sudden load loss which is considered as a fault condition.
Page 356 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Level detector 1 Start value high This module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the set Start value high value, setting. If all the phase current values are less than the set the loss of load condition is detected and an enable signal is sent to the timer. This Start signal is disabled after one or several phase currents have exceeded the set value high value of the element.
Page 357 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.9.6 Signals Table 349: LOFLPTUC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block all binary out- puts by resetting timers Table 350: LOFLPTUC Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 358: Loss Of Phase, Undercurrent Phptuc
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.1.9.8 Monitored data Table 354: LOFLPTUC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time LOFLPTUC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.1.9.9 Technical data Table 355: LOFLPTUC Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 359 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.10.2 Function block Figure 177: Function block 4.1.10.3 Functionality The loss of phase, undercurrent, protection function PHPTUC is used to detect an undercurrent that is considered as a fault condition. PHPTUC starts when the current is less than the set limit. Operation time characteristics are according to definite time (DT).
Page 360 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H timer. This signal is disabled after one or several phase currents have exceeded the Start value value of the element. If in the "Single Phase" mode any of the phase current values are less than the value Start value setting, the condition is detected and an enable signal is sent to of the the timer.
Page 361 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.10.6 Signals Table 357: PHPTUC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block all binary out- puts by resetting timers Table 358: PHPTUC Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 362: Thermal Overload Protection For Motors Mpttr
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.1.10.8 Monitored data Table 362: PHPTUC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time PHPTUC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.1.10.9 Technical data Table 363: PHPTUC Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 363 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.1.11.3 Functionality The thermal overload protection for motors function MPTTR protects the electric motors from overheating. MPTTR models the thermal behavior of motor on the basis of the measured load current and disconnects the motor when the thermal content reaches 100 percent.
Page 364 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H the ambient temperature of a motor exceeds or remains below 40°C. A motor operating at a higher temperature, even if at or below rated load, can subject the motor windings to excessive temperature similar to that resulting from overload operation at normal ambient temperature.
Page 365 1MRS757644 H Protection functions       −   τ  + × × − ×    θ × ×         (Equation 18)     ...
Page 366 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The required overload factor and negative sequence current heating effect factor Overload factor and Negative Seq factor settings. are set by the values of the In order to accurately calculate the motor thermal condition, different time constants are used in the above equations.
Page 367 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The activation of the BLOCK input blocks the ALARM, BLK_RESTART and OPERATE outputs. 3840 1920 Figure 182: Trip curves when no prior load and p=20...100 %. Overload factor = 1.05. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 368 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 3840 1920 160 320 480 640 Figure 183: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=100 %, Overload factor = 1.05. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 369 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 3840 1920 Figure 184: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=50 %. Overload factor = 1.05. 4.1.11.5 Application MPTTR is intended to limit the motor thermal level to predetermined values during the abnormal motor operating conditions. This prevents a premature motor insulation failure.
Page 370 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H line voltage or single phasing. The protection of insulation failure by the implementation of current sensing cannot detect some of these conditions, such as restricted ventilation. Similarly, the protection by sensing temperature alone can be inadequate in cases like frequent starting or jogging. The thermal overload protection addresses these deficiencies to a larger extent by deploying a motor thermal model based on load current.
Page 371 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4000 3000 2000 1000 Cold curve 1.05 Figure 185: The influence of Weighting factor p at prior load 1xFLC, timeconstant = 640 s, and Overload factor = 1.05 Setting the overload factor Overload factor defines the highest permissible continuous load. The The value of recommended value is 1.05.
Page 372 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H can be more severe than the heating effects and therefore a separate unbalance protection is used. Unbalances in other connected loads in the same busbar can also affect the motor. A voltage unbalance typically produces 5 to 7 times higher current unbalance. Because the thermal overload protection is based on the highest TRMS value of the phase current, the additional heating in stator winding is automatically taken Negative Seq factor setting...
Page 373 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Alarm thermal value is set to a level which allows the use of the full The value of thermal capacity of the motor without causing a trip due to a long overload time. Generally, the prior alarm level is set to a value of 80 to 90 percent of the trip level. 4.1.11.6 Signals Table 366: MPTTR Input signals...
Page 374 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Time constant nor- 80...4000 Motor time con- stant during the normal operation of motor Time constant 80...4000 Motor time con- start stant during the start of motor Time constant stop 80...60000 Motor time con- stant during the standstill condition...
Page 375: Earth-Fault Protection
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description THERMLEV_END FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 Thermal level at the end of motor startup situation T_ENARESTART INT32 0...99999 Estimated time to reset of block restart MPTTR Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Therm-Lev FLOAT32 0.00...9.99...
Page 376: Non-Directional Earth-Fault Protection Efxptoc
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Earth-fault protection 4.2.1 Non-directional earth-fault protection EFxPTOC 4.2.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Non-directional earth-fault protec- EFLPTOC Io> 51N-1 tion, low stage Non-directional earth-fault protec- EFHPTOC Io>> 51N-2 tion, high stage Non-directional earth-fault protec- EFIPTOC...
Page 377 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 187: Functional module diagram Level detector Io signal Sel . The selectable The operating quantity can be selected with the setting options are "Measured Io" and "Calculated Io". The operating quantity is compared Start value . If the measured value exceeds the set Start value , the level to the set detector sends an enable-signal to the timer module.
Page 378 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired The setting parameter operate time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used. Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting.
Page 379 1MRS757644 H Protection functions special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are Operating applicable. The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the curve type values "ANSI Def.
Page 380 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Type of reset curve setting does not apply to EFIPTOC or when the Reset delay DT operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by the time setting. 4.2.1.7 Application EFxPTOC is designed for protection and clearance of earth faults in distribution and sub-transmission networks where the neutral point is isolated or earthed via a resonance coil or through low resistance.
Page 381 1MRS757644 H Protection functions EFIPTOC Input signals Table 379: EFIPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for cur- rent multiplier EFLPTOC Output signals Table 380: EFLPTOC Output signals Name Type...
Page 382 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 40...200000 Operate delay time Operating curve 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time 1=ANSI Ext. inv. type delay curve type 2=ANSI Very inv.
Page 383 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 386: EFLPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate 20...60000 Minimum operate time time for IDMT curves Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement 2=DFT Selects used meas- 1=RMS mode urement mode...
Page 384 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer program- mable curve Table 390: EFHPTOC Non group settings (Advanced)
Page 385 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.2.1.10 Monitored data Table 394: EFLPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time EFLPTOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 395: EFHPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 386 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.1.11 Technical data Table 397: EFxPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 EFLPTOC ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I EFHPTOC ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 ×...
Page 387: Directional Earth-Fault Protection Defxpdef
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Technical revision Change Internal improvement Internal improvement Table 399: EFHPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Minimum and default values changed to 40 Operate delay time setting ms for the Added a setting parameter for the "Meas- ured Io"...
Page 388 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.2.2 Function block Figure 188: Function block 4.2.2.3 Functionality The directional earth-fault protection function DEFxPDEF is used as directional earth-fault protection for feeders. The function starts and operates when the operating quantity (current) and polarizing quantity (voltage) exceed the set limits and the angle between them is inside the set operating sector.
Page 389 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Level detector Start value and The magnitude of the operating quantity is compared to the set Voltage start the magnitude of the polarizing quantity is compared to the set value . If both the limits are exceeded, the level detector sends an enabling signal to Enable voltage limit setting is set to "False", Voltage the timer module.
Page 390 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Directional calculation The directional calculation module monitors the angle between the polarizing Pol quantity setting, the quantity and operating quantity. Depending on the polarizing quantity can be the residual voltage (measured or calculated) or the negative sequence voltage. When the angle is in the operation sector, the module sends the enabling signal to the timer module.
Page 391 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Phase changed. The network rotating direction is defined with a system parameter rotation . The calculation of the component is affected but the angle difference calculation remains the same. When the residual voltage is used as the polarizing method, the network rotating direction change has no effect on the direction calculation.
Page 392 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Monitored data values Description ANGLE_RCA The angle difference between the operating angle and Characteristic angle, that is, AN- GLE_RCA = ANGLE – Characteristic angle. I_OPER The current that is used for fault detection. If the Operation mode setting is "Phase angle", "Phase angle 80"...
Page 393 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration >...
Page 394 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 190: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=0 degrees in a compensated network Example 2 The "Phase angle" mode is selected, solidly earthed network (φRCA = +60 deg) Characteristic angle = +60 deg => 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 395 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 191: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=+60 degrees in a solidly earthed network Example 3 The "Phase angle" mode is selected, isolated network (φRCA = -90 deg) Characteristic angle = -90 deg => 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 396 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 192: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=–90 degrees in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in an isolated neutral network In isolated networks, there is no intentional connection between the system neutral point and earth. The only connection is through the phase-to-earth capacitances (C ) of phases and leakage resistances (R ).
Page 397 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 193: Earth-fault situation in an isolated network Directional earth-fault protection in a compensated network In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive current measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation of the protection relays.
Page 398 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 194: Earth-fault situation in a compensated network The Petersen coil or the earthing resistor may be temporarily out of operation. To Characteristic keep the protection scheme selective, it is necessary to update the angle setting accordingly. This can be done with an auxiliary input in the protection relay which receives a signal from an auxiliary switch of the disconnector of the Petersen coil in compensated networks.
Page 399 1MRS757644 H Protection functions groups or the RCA_CTL input. Alternatively, the operating sector of the directional earth-fault protection function can be extended to cover the operating sectors of both neutral earthing principles. Such characteristic is valid for both unearthed and compensated network and does not require any modification in case the neutral earthing changes temporarily from the unearthed to compensated network or vice versa.
Page 400 IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are Operating applicable.
Page 401 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 407: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type DEFLPDEF DEFHPDEF Note (1) Immediate Available for all operate time curves (2) Def time re- Available for all operate time curves (3) Inverse reset Available only for ANSI and user programmable curves 4.2.2.8...
Page 402 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 196: Configurable operating sectors in phase angle characteristic Table 408: Momentary operating direction Fault direction The value for DIRECTION Angle between the polarizing and operating 0 = unknown quantity is not in any of the defined sectors. Angle between the polarizing and operating 1= forward quantity is in the forward sector.
Page 403 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Iosin(φ) and Iocos(φ) criteria A more modern approach to directional protection is the active or reactive current measurement. The operating characteristic of the directional operation depends on the earthing principle of the network. The Iosin(φ) characteristics is used in an isolated network, measuring the reactive component of the fault current caused by the earth capacitance.
Page 404 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 197: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in forward fault The operating sector is limited by angle correction, that is, the operating sector is 180 degrees - 2*(angle correction). Example 2. Iosin(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 2 Figure 198: Operating characteristic Iosin(φ) in reverse fault 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 405 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Example 3. Iocos(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 1 Figure 199: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in forward fault Example 4. Iocos(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 2 Figure 200: Operating characteristic Iocos(φ) in reverse fault 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 406 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Phase angle 80 Operation mode setting The operation criterion phase angle 80 is selected with the by using the value "Phase angle 80". Phase angle 80 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the following differences: Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they •...
Page 407 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Io / % of I Min forward angle 80 deg Operating zone 3% of In 70 deg Non- 1% of In operating zone Figure 202: Phase angle 80 amplitude ( Directional mode = Forward) Phase angle 88 Operation mode setting The operation criterion phase angle 88 is selected with the using the value "Phase angle 88".
Page 408 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 203: Operating characteristic for phase angle 88 Io / % of I 88 deg 100% of In Min forward angle 85 deg 20% of In 73 deg 1% of In Figure 204: Phase angle 88 amplitude ( Directional mode = Forward) 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 409 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.2.2.9 Application The directional earth-fault protection DEFxPDEF is designed for protection and clearance of earth faults and for earth-fault protection of different equipment connected to the power systems, such as shunt capacitor banks or shunt reactors, and for backup earth-fault protection of power transformers.
Page 410 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H polarizing quantity. The polarizing quantity can be rotated 180 degrees by setting Pol reversal parameter to "True" or by switching the polarity of the residual voltage measurement wires. Although the Iosin(φ) operation can be used in solidly earthed networks, the phase angle is recommended.
Page 411 1MRS757644 H Protection functions DEFLPDEF Input signals Table 410: DEFLPDEF Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for cur- rent multiplier RCA_CTL BOOLEAN...
Page 412 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.2.11 Settings DEFLPDEF Group settings Table 414: DEFLPDEF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...5.000 0.005 0.010 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scal- ing the start value Directional mode 2=Forward Directional mode...
Page 413 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 415: DEFLPDEF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset Operation mode 1=Phase angle Operation criteria 1=Phase angle 2=IoSin 3=IoCos 4=Phase angle 80...
Page 414 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pol reversal 0=False Rotate polarizing 0=False quantity 1=True Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io Selection for used 1=Measured Io Io signal 2=Calculated Io Uo signal Sel 1=Measured Uo Selection for used 1=Measured Uo Uo signal 2=Calculated Uo...
Page 415 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min reverse angle 0...180 Minimum phase an- gle in reverse direc- tion Voltage start value 0.010...1.000 0.001 0.010 Voltage start value Table 419: DEFHPDEF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default...
Page 416 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min operate volt- 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.01 Minimum operating voltage Correction angle 0.0...10.0 Angle correction Pol reversal 0=False Rotate polarizing 0=False quantity 1=True Io signal Sel 1=Measured Io Selection for used 1=Measured Io Io signal 2=Calculated Io...
Page 417 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_OPER FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Calculated oper- ating current DEFLPDEF Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 423: DEFHPDEF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description FAULT_DIR Enum Detected fault 0=unknown direction 1=forward...
Page 418 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.2.13 Technical data Table 424: DEFxPDEF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 DEFLPDEF Current: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Voltage ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Phase angle: ±2°...
Page 419: Transient-Intermittent Earth-Fault Protection Intrptef
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.2.2.14 Technical revision history Table 425: DEFHPDEF Technical revision history Technical revision Change Maximum value changed to 180 deg for the Max forward angle setting Added a setting parameter for the "Meas- ured Io" or "Calculated Io" selection and set- ting parameter for the "Measured Uo", "Cal- culated Uo"...
Page 420 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Transient/intermittent earth-fault INTRPTEF Io> -> IEF 67NIEF protection 4.2.3.2 Function block Figure 206: Function block 4.2.3.3 Functionality The transient/intermittent earth-fault protection function INTRPTEF is a function designed for the protection and clearance of permanent and intermittent earth faults in distribution and sub-transmission networks.
Page 421 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Timer 1 Fault OPERATE Transient indication detector START logic Timer 2 Level BLK_EF detector Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 207: Functional module diagram Level detector Uo signal Sel setting. The options The residual voltage can be selected from the are "Measured Uo"...
Page 422 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H the parallel resistor of the coil, with security margin. For example, if the resistive current of the parallel resistor is 10 A, then a value of 0.7×10 A = 7 A could be used. The same setting is also applicable in case the coil is disconnected and the network becomes unearthed.
Page 423 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 208: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Transient EF” mode in the faulty feeder In the "Intermittent EF" mode the OPERATE output is activated when the following conditions are fulfilled: Peak counter limit • the number of transients that have been detected exceeds the setting Operate delay time •...
Page 424 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 209: Example of INTRPTEF operation in ”Intermittent EF” mode in the faulty feeder, Peak counter limit=3 The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the monitored data view.
Page 425 1MRS757644 H Protection functions output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated. 4.2.3.5 Application INTRPTEF is an earth-fault function dedicated to operate in intermittent and permanent earth faults occurring in distribution and sub-transmission networks. Fault detection is done from the residual current and residual voltage signals by monitoring the transients with predefined criteria.
Page 426 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H as the fault moment on the voltage wave, fault location, fault resistance and the parameters of the feeders and the supplying transformers. In the fault initiation, the voltage of the faulty phase decreases and the corresponding capacitance is discharged to earth (→...
Page 427 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.2.3.7 Settings Table 429: INTRPTEF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Directional mode 2=Forward Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward 3=Reverse Operate delay time 40...1200000 Operate delay time Voltage start value 0.05...0.50 0.01 0.20 Voltage start value Table 430: INTRPTEF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter...
Page 428: Admittance-Based Earth-Fault Protection Efpadm
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.3.9 Technical data Table 433: INTRPTEF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy (Uo criteria with transient protection) Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × Uo Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics...
Page 429 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.2.4.2 Function block Figure 212: Function block 4.2.4.3 Functionality The admittance-based earth-fault protection function EFPADM provides a selective earth-fault protection function for high-resistance earthed, unearthed and compensated networks. It can be applied for the protection of overhead lines as well as with underground cables.
Page 430 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Timer OPERATE Neutral Operation admittance characteristics calculation START RELEASE Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 213: Functional module diagram Neutral admittance calculation Io signal Sel setting. The setting The residual current can be selected from the options are "Measured Io" and "Calculated Io". If "Measured Io" is selected, the current ratio for Io-channel is given in Configuration >...
Page 431 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The polarity of the polarizing quantity Uo can be changed, that is, Pol reversal parameter to "True" or rotated by 180 degrees, by setting the by switching the polarity of the residual voltage measurement wires. As an alternative for the internal residual overvoltage-based start condition, the neutral admittance protection can also be externally released by utilizing the RELEASE input.
Page 432 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Neutral admittance calculation produces certain values during forward and reverse faults. Fault in reverse direction, that is, outside the protected feeder. = − Fdtot (Equation 28) ≈ − ⋅ j (Equation 29) Sum of the phase-to-earth admittances ( Y ) of the protected Fdtot feeder...
Page 433 1MRS757644 H Protection functions A B C Protected feeder Background network Reverse Fault eTot Im(Yo) Re(Yo) Reverse fault: Yo ≈ -j*I Figure 214: Admittance calculation during a reverse fault Resistance of the parallel resistor Inductance of the compensation coil Resistance of the neutral earthing resistor Phase-to-earth admittance of the protected feeder Phase-to-earth admittance of the background network For example, in a 15 kV compensated network with the magnitude of the earth-fault...
Page 434 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H In this case, the resistive part of the measured admittance is due to leakage losses of the protected feeder. As they are typically very small, the resistive part is close to zero. Due to inaccuracies in the voltage and current measurement, the small real part of the apparent neutral admittance may appear positive.
Page 435 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Equation 31 shows that in case of a fault inside the protected feeder in unearthed networks, the measured admittance equals the admittance of the background network. The admittance is dominantly reactive; the small resistive part of the measured admittance is due to the leakage losses of the background network.
Page 436 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H A B C Protected feeder Forward Fault eTot Background network eTot Forward fault, high resistance earthed network: Yo ≈ (I +j*(I ))/U eTot Im(Yo) Forward fault, unearthed network: Yo ≈ j*(I eTot Under-comp. (K<1) Re(Yo) Resonance (K=1) Reverse fault: Yo ≈...
Page 437 1MRS757644 H Protection functions must therefore be based on the real part of the measured admittance, that is, conductance. Thus, the best selectivity is achieved when the compensated network is operated either in the undercompensated or overcompensated mode. For example, in a 15 kV compensated network, the magnitude of the earth-fault current of the protected feeder is 10 A (Rf = 0 Ω) and the magnitude of the network is 100 A (Rf = 0 Ω).
Page 438 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 435: Operation criteria Operation mode Description Admittance criterion Susceptance criterion Conductance criterion Yo, Go Admittance criterion combined with the con- ductance criterion Yo, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the sus- ceptance criterion Go, Bo Conductance criterion combined with the susceptance criterion Yo, Go, Bo Admittance criterion combined with the con-...
Page 439 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 216: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Non-directional" 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 440 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 217: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Forward" 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 441 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 218: Admittance characteristic with different operation modes when Directional mode = "Reverse" 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 442 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set with the Operate delay time setting, the OPERATE output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module operates, the reset timer is activated.
Page 443 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 219: Overadmittance characteristic. Left figure: classical origin-centered admittance circle. Right figure: admittance circle is set off from the origin. Non-directional overconductance characteristic Operation mode The non-directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the Directional mode to "Non-directional". The characteristic is setting set to "Go"...
Page 444 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Forward directional overconductance characteristic Operation The forward directional overconductance criterion is enabled with the mode setting set to "Go" and Directional mode set to "Forward". The characteristic Conductance forward is defined by one overconductance boundary line with the setting.
Page 445 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 222: Forward directional oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure: classical forward directional oversusceptance criterion. Middle figure: characteristic is tilted with negative tilt angle. Right figure: characteristic is tilted with positive tilt angle. Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic The combined overadmittance and overconductance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Yo, Go"...
Page 446 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 223: Combined overadmittance and overconductance characteristic. Left figure: classical origin-centered admittance circle combined with two overconductance boundary lines. Right figure: admittance circle is set off from the origin. Combined overconductance and oversusceptance characteristic The combined overconductance and oversusceptance criterion is enabled with the Operation mode setting set to "Go, Bo".
Page 447 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 224: Combined forward directional overconductance and forward directional oversusceptance characteristic. Left figure: the Conductance tilt Ang and Susceptance tilt Ang settings equal zero degrees. Right figure: the setting Conductance tilt Ang > 0 degrees and the setting Susceptance tilt Ang < 0 degrees. Figure 225: Combined non-directional overconductance and non-directional oversusceptance characteristic The non-directional overconductance and non-directional...
Page 448 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.4.6 Application Admittance-based earth-fault protection provides a selective earth-fault protection for high-resistance earthed, unearthed and compensated networks. It can be applied for the protection of overhead lines as well as with underground cables. It can be used as an alternative solution to traditional residual current-based earth-fault protection functions, for example the IoCos mode in DEFxPDEF.
Page 449 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Unearthed Resonance, K = 1 Over/Under-Compensated, K = 1.2/0.8 Rf = 500 ohm Rf = 2500 ohm Rf = 5000 ohm Rf = 10000 ohm 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Total earth f ault current (A), Rf = 0 ohm...
Page 450 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Voltage start value = 0.15 × Un Figure 227 According to , this selection ensures at least a sensitivity corresponding to a 2000 ohm fault resistance when the compensation degree varies between 80% and 120%. The greatest sensitivity is achieved when the compensation degree is close to full resonance.
Page 451 1MRS757644 H Protection functions from origin to include some margin for the admittance operation point due to CT/VT-errors, when fault is located outside the feeder. Conductance forward : 15 A/(15 kV/sqrt(3)) * 0.2 = +0.35 mS corresponding to 3.0 A (at 15 kV). The selected value provides margin considering also the effect of CT/VT-errors in case of outside faults.
Page 452 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.4.7 Signals Table 436: EFPADM Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to re- lease neutral admit- tance protection Table 437: EFPADM Output signals Name...
Page 453 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Susceptance for- -500.00...500.00 0.01 1.00 Susceptance ward threshold in for- ward direction Susceptance re- -500.00...500.00 0.01 -1.00 Susceptance verse threshold in re- verse direction Table 439: EFPADM Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 454: Rotor Earth-Fault Protection Mrefptoc
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.4.9 Monitored data Table 442: EFPADM Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / operate time FAULT_DIR Enum Detected fault 0=unknown direction 1=forward 2=backward 3=both COND_RES FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000.0 Real part of cal- culated neutral admittance...
Page 455 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.2.5.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Rotor earth-fault protection MREFPTOC Io>R 4.2.5.2 Function block Figure 230: Function block 4.2.5.3 Functionality The rotor earth-fault protection function MREFPTOC is used to detect an earth fault in the rotor circuit of synchronous machines.
Page 456 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Level detector 1 Operate The measured rotor earth-fault current (DFT value) is compared to the start value setting. If the measured value exceeds that of the Operate start value setting, Level detector 1 sends a signal to start the Timer 1 module. Level detector 2 Alarm The measured rotor earth-fault current (DFT value) is compared to the set...
Page 457 1MRS757644 H Protection functions severe magnetic imbalance and heavy rotor vibrations that soon lead to a severe damage. Therefore, it is essential that any occurrence of an insulation failure is detected and that the machine is disconnected as soon as possible. Normally, the device is tripped after a short time delay.
Page 458 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 233: Measured current as a function of the rotor earth-fault resistance with various field-to-earth capacitance values with the measuring circuit resistance Rm = 3.0 Ω, fn = 50 Hz. Only one coupling capacitor is used. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 459 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.2.5.6 Signals Table 444: MREFPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 445: MREFPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start ALARM...
Page 460: Harmonics-Based Earth-Fault Protection Haefptoc
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.5.8 Monitored data Table 449: MREFPTOC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time MREFPTOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.2.5.9 Technical data Table 450: MREFPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 461 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.2.6.3 Functionality The harmonics-based earth-fault protection function HAEFPTOC is used instead of a traditional earth-fault protection in networks where a fundamental frequency component of the earth-fault current is low due to compensation. By default, HAEFPTOC is used as a standalone mode. Substation-wide application can be achieved using horizontal communication where the detection of a faulty feeder is done by comparing the harmonics earth-fault current measurements.
Page 462 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The harmonics current I_HARM_RES is available in the monitored data view. The value is also sent over horizontal communication to the other protection relays on the parallel feeders configured in the protection scheme. Frequency Figure 236: High-pass filter Level detector Start value setting.
Page 463 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 451: Values of the Enable reference use setting Enable reference use Functionality Standalone In the standalone mode, depending on the value Operating curve type setting, the time char- of the acteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of the Oper- ate delay time setting in the DT mode or the value...
Page 464 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired The setting parameter operation time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used Minimum operate time setting should be used with great care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve but always at least the value of the Minimum operate time setting.
Page 465 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Analogue GOOSE receive Analogue GOOSE receive HAEFPTOC START Analogue OPERATE I_REF_RES GOOSE I_HARM_RES BLOCK send BLKD_I_REF Analogue GOOSE receive Figure 237: Protection scheme based on the analog GOOSE communication with three analog GOOSE receivers 4.2.6.6 Signals Table 452: HAEFPTOC Input signals Name Type...
Page 466 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.6.7 Settings Table 454: HAEFPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...5.00 0.01 0.10 Start value Time multiplier 0.05...15.000 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves Operate delay time 100...200000 Operate delay time Operating curve 15=IEC Def.
Page 467 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer program- mable curve Table 457: HAEFPTOC Non group settings (Advanced)
Page 468: Wattmetric-Based Earth-Fault Protection Wpwde
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.7 Wattmetric-based earth-fault protection WPWDE 4.2.7.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Wattmetric-based earth-fault pro- WPWDE Po> -> tection 4.2.7.2 Function block Figure 238: Function block 4.2.7.3 Functionality The wattmetric-based earth-fault protection function WPWDE can be used to detect earth faults in unearthed networks, compensated networks (Petersen coil- earthed networks) or networks with a high-impedance earthing.
Page 469 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The minus sign (-) is needed to match the polarity of calculated and measured residual currents. The operation of WPWDE can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Timer Directional Level...
Page 470 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 240: Definition of the relay characteristic angle Characteristic angle setting The phase angle difference is calculated based on the (also known as Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA) or Relay Base Angle or Maximum Characteristic angle setting is done based on the method Torque Angle (MTA)).
Page 471 1MRS757644 H Protection functions -Uo (Polarizing quantity) Forward area Backward area RCA = -90˚ Maximum torque line Io (Operating quantity) Minimum operate current Forward area Backward area Figure 241: Definition of relay characteristic angle, RCA = -90° in an isolated network Characteristic angle should be set to a positive value if the operating signal lags the polarizing signal and to a negative value if the operating signal leads the polarizing signal.
Page 472 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Maximum torque line forward direction (RCA = 0˚) -Uo (Polarizing quantity) Io (Operating quantity) Forward Forward area area Zero torque line Correction angle Correction angle Minimum operate current Backward Backward area area Figure 242: Definition of correction angle The polarity of the polarizing quantity can be changed (rotated by 180°) by setting Pol reversal to "True"...
Page 473 1MRS757644 H Protection functions current channel Configuration > Analog inputs > Current (Io, CT). If "Calculated Io" is selected, the nominal values for primary and secondary are obtained from the current transformer ratio entered for phase current channels Configuration > Analog inputs >...
Page 474 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Residual Power start value of 1.0 × Pn corresponds then 1.0 × 20.000 kV × 100 A = 2000kW in primary Uo signal Sel setting, the nominal If "Calculated Uo" is selected for the value for residual voltage Un is always phase-to-phase voltage. Thus, the Voltage start value is 0.577 ×...
Page 475 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 243: Operation time curves for wattmetric IDMT for S ref set at 0.15 xPn 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 476 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.2.7.6 Measurement modes The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and Measurement mode "Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the setting. 4.2.7.7 Application The wattmetric method is one of the commonly used directional methods for detecting the earth faults especially in compensated networks.
Page 477 1MRS757644 H Protection functions ΣI ΣI ΣI ΣI Figure 245: Typical radial compensated network employed with wattmetric protection The wattmetric function is activated when the residual active power component exceeds the set limit. However, to ensure a selective operation, it is also required that the residual current and residual voltage also exceed the set limit.
Page 478 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The use of wattmetric protection gives a possibility to use the dedicated inverse definite minimum time characteristics. This is applicable in large high-impedance earthed networks with a large capacitive earth-fault current. In a network employing a low-impedance earthed system, a medium-size neutral point resistor is used.
Page 479 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operating curve 15=IEC Def. Time Selection of time 5=ANSI Def. Time type delay curve type 15=IEC Def. Time 20=Wattmetric IDMT Operate delay time 60...200000 Operate delay time for definite time Table 464: WPWDE Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range)
Page 480: Multifrequency Admittance-Based Earth-Fault Protection Mfadpsde
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between polar- izing and operating quantity ANGLE_RCA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between operat- ing angle and charac- teristic angle RES_POWER FLOAT32 -160.000...160.000 Calculated residual ac- tive power WPWDE Enum Status...
Page 481 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.2.8.2 Function block Figure 246: Function block 4.2.8.3 Functionality The multifrequency admittance-based earth-fault protection function MFADPSDE provides selective directional earth-fault protection for high-impedance earthed networks, that is, for compensated, unearthed and high resistance earthed systems. It can be applied for the earth-fault protection of overhead lines and underground cables.
Page 482 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 247: Functional module diagram General fault criterion The General fault criterion ( GFC) module monitors the presence of earth fault in the network and it is based on the value of the fundamental frequency zero-sequence voltage defined as the vector sum of fundamental frequency phase voltage phasors divided by three.
Page 483 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Fundamental frequency admittance (conductance and susceptance) ⋅ + ⋅ − (Equation 47) The fundamental frequency neutral admittance phasor. The fundamental frequency zero-sequence current phasor ) / ) The fundamental frequency zero-sequence voltage phasor ) / ) Re Y The fundamental frequency conductance, Im Y...
Page 484 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The polarity of the polarizing quantity (residual voltage) can be changed Pol reversal parameter to "True" (rotated by 180 degrees) by setting the or by switching the polarity of the residual voltage measurement wires. Fault direction determination If an earth fault is detected by the GFC module, the fault direction is evaluated based on the calculated sum admittance phasor obtained from the Multi-...
Page 485 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 248: Principle of Cumulative Phasor Summing (CPS) The CPS technique provides a stable directional phasor quantity despite individual phasors varying in magnitude and phase angle in time due to a non-stable fault type such as restriking or intermittent earth fault. This is also true for harmonic components included in the sum admittance phasor.
Page 486 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H is also valid in compensated networks when there are harmonic components present in the fault quantities (typically low ohmic permanent or intermittent or restriking fault). In this case, the result is valid regardless of network’s actual compensation degree.
Page 487 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Tilt angle should reflect the measurement errors, that The characteristic Tilt angle setting is, the larger the measurement errors, the larger the should be. Typical setting value of 5 degrees is recommended. The detected fault direction is available in the Monitored data view as parameter DIRECTION .
Page 488 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H + ⋅ ⋅ + ⋅ o stab ostab ostab baseres oCosstab oSinsta (Equation 56) The stabilized fundamental frequency residual current estimate, which is ob- tained (after conversion) from the corresponding admittance value by multi- o stab plying it with the system nominal phase-to-earth voltage value.
Page 489 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 250: Illustration of amplitude and resistive current sectors if Operating quantity is set “Adaptive” and Directional mode is set “Forward” The setting rules for current thresholds are given below. Min operate In case the “Adaptive” operating quantity is selected, the setting current should be set to value: <...
Page 490 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H For example, if the resistive current of the parallel resistor is 10 A (at primary voltage level), then a value of 0.5 · 10 A = 5 A could be used. The same setting is also applicable in case the coil is disconnected and the network becomes unearthed (as in this case this setting is compared to the amplitude of ).
Page 491 1MRS757644 H Protection functions PEAK_IND release Reset timer INTR_EF Reset delay time Reset delay time Figure 251: Example of operation of Transient detector: indication of detected transient by PEAK_IND output and detection of restriking or intermittent earth fault by INTR_EF output (setting Peak counter limit = 3) Operation logic MFADPSDE supports three operation modes selected with setting Operation mode: “General EF”, “Alarming EF”...
Page 492 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H three conditions is not valid. The start duration value START_DUR, available in the Monitored data view, indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. In case detection of temporary earth faults is not desired, the activation Start delay time .
Page 493 1MRS757644 H Protection functions to detect earth faults regardless of their type (transient, intermittent or restriking, Voltage start value defines the basic permanent, high or low ohmic). The setting sensitivity of the MFADPSDE function. In “Alarming EF” mode, the operate timer is started during the following conditions.
Page 494 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 253: Operation in “Alarming EF” mode Operation mode “Intermittent EF” is dedicated for detecting restriking or intermittent earth faults. A required number of intermittent earth fault transients Peak counter limit setting must be detected for operation. Therefore, set with the transient faults or permanent faults with only initial fault ignition transient are not detected in “Intermittent EF”...
Page 495 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Peak When a required number of intermittent earth-fault transients set with the counter limit setting are detected without the function being reset (depends on Reset delay time setting), the START output is the drop-off time set with the activated.
Page 496 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 254: Operation in “Intermittent EF” mode, Peak counter limit = 3 Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration > System >...
Page 497 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Timer If the detected fault direction is opposite to the set directional mode and GFC Start delay time has elapsed. release is active, BLK_EF output is activated once Reset timer is activated at the falling edge of General Fault Criterion release, that Voltage start value .
Page 498 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The operation of MFADPSDE is based on multi-frequency neutral admittance measurement utilizing cumulative phasor summing technique. This concept provides extremely secure, dependable and selective earth-fault protection also in cases where the residual quantities are highly distorted and contain non- fundamental frequency components.
Page 499 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode RELEASE BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to re- lease neutral admit- tance protection RESET BOOLEAN 0=False External trigger to re- set direction calcula- tion Table 469: MFADPSDE Output signals Name...
Page 500 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 472: MFADPSDE Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Operation mode 3=General EF Operation criteria 1=Intermittent EF 3=General EF 4=Alarming EF Table 473: MFADPSDE Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 501: Differential Protection
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Angle between polarizing and operating quan- tity MFADPSDE Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.2.8.9 Technical data Table 475: MFADPSDE Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 502: Stabilized And Instantaneous Differential Protection For Machines Mpdif
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.3.1 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for machines MPDIF 4.3.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Stabilized and instantaneous differ- MPDIF 3dI>M/G 87M/G ential protection for machines 4.3.1.2 Function block Figure 256: Function block 4.3.1.3 Functionality...
Page 503 1MRS757644 H Protection functions I_A1 Differential I_B1 and bias calculation I_C1 I_A2 Through Instan- I_B2 OPERATE fault taneous detection high stage I_C2 OPR_LS OPR_HS Biased low component stage INT_BLKD detection saturation based blocking BLOCK BLK_OPR_LS BLK_OPR_HS Figure 257: Functional module diagram Differential and bias calculation Differential calculation module calculates the differential current.
Page 504 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H the operation characteristics. When an internal fault occurs, the currents on both sides of the protected object are flowing into it. This causes the biasing current to be considerably smaller, which makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults.
Page 505 1MRS757644 H Protection functions characteristics. In other words, the temporary limit has superposed the unchanged operating characteristics and temporarily determines the highest sensitivity of the protection. The temporary sensitivity is less than the sensitivity in section 1 of the operating characteristic and is supposed to prevent an unwanted trip during the external faults with lower currents.
Page 506 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H End section 1 , the differential current required for In section 1, where 0.0 < I < tripping is constant. The value of the differential current is the same as the operate value setting selected for the function block. The Low operate value setting allows for small inaccuracies of the current transformers but it can also be used to influence the overall level of the operating characteristic.
Page 507 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 258: Positive direction of current Instantaneous high stage The differential protection includes an unbiased instantaneous high stage. The instantaneous stage operates and the OPR_HS output is activated when the amplitude of the fundamental frequency component of the differential current High operate value or when the instantaneous peak values of the exceeds the set High operate value .
Page 508 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 259: Operating characteristic for the stabilized stage of the generator differential protection function 4.3.1.5 Application The differential protection works on the principle of calculating the differential current at the two ends of the winding, that is, the current entering the winding is compared to the current exiting the winding.
Page 509 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The DC restraint feature should be used in case of an application with a long DC time constant in the fault currents is present. This fault current may be of a lesser magnitude (less than rated current) but is unpleasant and tends to saturate the CT and operate the differential protection for external faults.
Page 510 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H measurement conductors have a resistance of 0.113 Ω, the actual burden of the current transformer is S = (5A)² × (0.113 + 0.020) Ω = 3.33 VA. Thus, the accuracy limit factor F corresponding to the actual burden is about 46. The CT burden can grow considerably at the rated current 5A.
Page 511 1MRS757644 H Protection functions A fault occurring at the substation bus. The protection must be stable at a fault arising during a normal operating situation. The reenergizing of the transformer against a bus fault leads to very high fault currents and thermal stress. Therefore, reenergizing is not preferred in this case.
Page 512 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Alternative 2 is more cost-effective and therefore often better, although the sensitivity of the scheme is slightly reduced. Example 2 Here the actions according to alternative 2 are taken to improve the actual accuracy limit factor. ...
Page 513 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 260: Connection of current transformer of Type 1, example 1 Figure 261: Connection of current transformer of Type 1, example 2 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 514 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 262: Connection of current transformer of Type 2, example 1 Figure 263: Connection of current transformer of Type 2, example 2 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 515 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Saturation of current transformers There are basically two types of saturation phenomena that have to be detected: the AC saturation and the DC saturation. The AC saturation is caused by a high fault current where the CT magnetic flux exceeds its maximum value. As a result, Figure 264 the secondary current is distorted as shown in .
Page 516 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description I_C1 Signal Phase C primary cur- rent I_A2 Signal Phase A secondary current I_B2 Signal Phase B secondary current I_C2 Signal Phase C secondary current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode BLK_OPR_LS...
Page 517 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 479: MPDIF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Slope section 3 10...100 Slope of the third line of the operat- ing characteristics DC restrain enable 0=False Setting for ena- 0=False bling DC restrain 1=True feature Table 480: MPDIF Non group settings (Basic)
Page 518 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_ANGL_B1_C1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle phase B to C, line side I_ANGL_C1_A1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle phase C to A, line side I_ANGL_A2_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle phase A to B, neutral side I_ANGL_B2_C2...
Page 519: Stabilized And Instantaneous Differential Protection For Two-Winding Transformers Tr2Ptdf
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset time <40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0.96 Retardation time <20 ms 4.3.2 Stabilized and instantaneous differential protection for two-winding transformers TR2PTDF 4.3.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Stabilized and instantaneous differ- TR2PTDF...
Page 520 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.3.2.4 Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of TR2PTDF can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 521 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Winding 1 Winding 2 (usually HV) (usually LV) Figure 268: Positive direction of the currents (Equation 69) In a normal situation, no fault occurs in the area protected by TR2PTDF. Then the currents I and I are equal and the differential current I is zero.
Page 522 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H CT connection type is according to When the vector group matching is Yy0 and the "Type 2", the phase angle of the phase currents connected to the protection relay does not change. When the vector group matching is Yy6, the phase currents are turned 180°...
Page 523 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Zro A elimination parameter always removed from both sides automatically. The cannot change this. Clock number is "Clk Num 1", "Clk Num 5", "Clk Num 7" or "Clk Num 11", the vector group matching is done on one side only. A possible zero-sequence component of the phase currents at earth faults occurring outside the protection area is eliminated in the numerically implemented delta connection before the differential current and the biasing current are calculated.
Page 524 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H input current values on the side where the tap changer resides are scaled to match the currents on the other side. A correct scaling is determined by the number of steps and the direction of the deviation from the nominal tap and the percentage change in voltage resulting from a deviation of one tap step.
Page 525 1MRS757644 H Protection functions times the rated current and the halving time can be up to several seconds. To the differential protection, the inrush current represents a differential current, which would cause the differential protection to operate almost always when the transformer is connected to the network.
Page 526 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Fifth harmonic blocking The inhibition of TR2PTDF operation in the situations of overexcitation is based on the ratio of the fifth harmonic and the fundamental component of the differential current (Id5f/Id1f) . The ratio is calculated separately for each phase without Start value 5.H and if blocking is weighting .
Page 527 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Biased low stage The current differential protection needs to be biased because the possible appearance of a differential current can be due to something else than an actual fault in the transformer (or generator). In the case of transformer protection, a false differential current can be caused by: •...
Page 528 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 271: Operation logic of the biased low stage The high currents passing through a protected object can be caused by the short circuits outside the protected area, the large currents fed by the transformer in motor start-up or the transformer inrush situations.
Page 529 1MRS757644 H Protection functions faults. When the operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the second harmonic blocking functionality, the BLKD2H output is activated. When operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the fifth harmonic blocking functionality, the BLKD5H output is activated.
Page 530 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The slope of the differential function's operating characteristic curve varies in the different sections of the range. • In section 1, where 0 percent Ir < Ib < End section 1, End section 1 being fixed to 50 percent Ir, the differential current required for tripping is constant.
Page 531 1MRS757644 H Protection functions occurred in the area protected by TR2PTDF. Then the internal blocking signals of the biased stage are inhibited. Instantaneous high stage The instantaneous high stage operation can be enabled and disabled with the Enable high set setting. The corresponding parameter values are "TRUE" and "FALSE."...
Page 532 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 275: Operation logic of instantaneous high stage Reset of the blocking signals (de-block) All three blocking signals, that is, waveform and second and fifth harmonic, have a counter, which holds the blocking on for a certain time after the blocking conditions have ceased to be fulfilled.
Page 533 1MRS757644 H Protection functions In some substations, there is a current differential protection for the busbar. The busbar protection includes bus work or cables between the circuit breaker and the power transformer. Internal electrical faults are very serious and cause immediate damage.
Page 534 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 276: Differential protection of a generator-transformer block and short cable/line TR2PTDF can also be used in three-winding transformer applications or two- winding transformer applications with two output feeders. On the double-feeder side of the power transformer, the current of the two CTs per phase must be summed by connecting the two CTs of each phase in parallel.
Page 535 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 277: Differential protection of a three-winding transformer and a transformer with two output feeders TR2PTDF can also be used for the protection of the power transformer feeding the frequency converter. An interposing CT is required for matching the three-winding transformer currents to a two-winding protection relay.
Page 536 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 278: Protection of the power transformer feeding the frequency converter Transforming ratio correction of CTs The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of the power transformer. The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both sides CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ration Cor Wnd 2 of the power transformer with the settings.
Page 537 1MRS757644 H Protection functions After the CT ratio correction, the measured currents and corresponding setting values of TR2PTDF are expressed in multiples of the rated power transformer current I ) or percentage value of I The rated input current (1A or 5A) of the relay does not have to be same for the HV and the LV side.
Page 538 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 483: TR2PTDF settings corresponding to the power transformer vector groups and zero-sequence elimination Vector group of Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A the transformer Elimination Clk Num 0 Not needed YNy0 Clk Num 0 HV side YNyn0...
Page 539 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Vector group of Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A the transformer Elimination Clk Num 6 Not needed Clk Num 8 Not needed Dd10 Clk Num 10 Not needed Clk Num 1 Not needed Dyn1 Clk Num 1 Not needed...
Page 540 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Vector group of Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A the transformer Elimination ZNyn7 Clk Num 7 HV side ZNy7 Clk Num 7 Not needed Zy11 Clk Num 11 Not needed Zyn11 Clk Num 11 Not needed ZNyn11 Clk Num 11...
Page 541 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Vector group of Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A the transformer Elimination Zzn2 Clk Num 2 Not needed Clk Num 4 Not needed ZNz4 Clk Num 4 Not needed ZNzn4 Clk Num 4 Not needed Zzn4 Clk Num 4...
Page 542 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Vector group of Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A the transformer Elimination Yy10 Clk Num 10 Not needed YNy10 Clk Num 10 Not needed YNyn10 Clk Num 10 Not needed Yyn10 Clk Num 10 Not needed Clk Num 1 Not needed...
Page 543 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Vector group of Winding 1 type Winding 2 type Clock number Zro A the transformer Elimination Yzn7 Clk Num 7 Not needed Yz11 Clk Num 11 Not needed YNz11 Clk Num 11 Not needed YNzn11 Clk Num 11 LV side Yzn11 Clk Num 11...
Page 544 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 280: Low voltage test arrangement. The three-phase low voltage source can be the station service transformer. Tapped winding control setting parameter has to be set to “Not in use” to make sure that the monitored current values are not scaled by the automatic adaptation to the tap changer position.
Page 545 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Recommendations for current transformers The more important the object to be protected, the more attention has to be paid to the current transformers. It is not normally possible to dimension the current transformer so that they repeat the currents with high DC components without saturating when the residual flux of the current transformer is high.
Page 546 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The accuracy limit factors corresponding to the actual burden of the phase current transformer to be used in differential protection fulfill the requirement. − > × × × × − ω (Equation 80) The maximum through-going fault current (in I ) at which the protection is not allowed to operate The primary DC time constant related to Ik...
Page 547 1MRS757644 H Protection functions A fault occurring at the substation bus: The protection must be stable at a fault arising during a normal operating situation. Re-energizing the transformer against a bus fault leads to very high fault currents and thermal stress and therefore re- energizing is not preferred in this case.
Page 548 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Example 2 Assuming that the actions according to alternative two above are taken in order to improve the actual accuracy limit factor: IrCT × IrTR (Equation 81) IrTR 1000 A (rated secondary side current of the power transformer) IrCT 1500 A (rated primary current of the CT on the transformer secondary side) 30 (rated accuracy limit factor of the CT)
Page 549 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 281: Connection example of current transformers of Type 1 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 550 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 282: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 1 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 551 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 283: Connection of current transformers of Type 2 and example of the currents during an external fault 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 552 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 284: Alternative connection example of current transformers of Type 2 The CT secondary currents often differ from the rated current at the rated load of the power transformer. The CT transforming ratios can be corrected on both CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 and CT ratio Cor Wnd 2 sides of the power transformer with the settings.
Page 553 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Default Description I_A2 SIGNAL Phase A secondary current I_B2 SIGNAL Phase B secondary current I_C2 SIGNAL Phase C secondary current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks operate out- puts from biased stage BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0=False...
Page 554 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 2.H 7...20 2. harmonic block- ing ratio Start value 5.H 10...50 5. harmonic block- ing ratio Table 487: TR2PTDF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Enable high set...
Page 555 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Zro A elimination 1=Not eliminated Elimination of the 1=Not eliminated zero-sequence cur- 2=Winding 1 rent 3=Winding 2 4=Winding 1 and 2 CT ratio Cor Wnd 1 0.40...4.00 0.01 1.00 CT ratio correction, winding 1 CT ratio Cor Wnd 2...
Page 556 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic restraint 0=False block phase A status 1=True BLKD2H_B BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic restraint 0=False block phase B status 1=True BLKD2H_C BOOLEAN 2nd harmonic restraint 0=False block phase C status 1=True BLKD5H_A BOOLEAN...
Page 557 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_AMPL_B2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group com- pensated secondary current phase B I_AMPL_C2 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group com- pensated secondary current phase C ID_A FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential Current phase A ID_B FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential Current...
Page 558: Numerical Stabilized Low-Impedance Restricted Earth-Fault Protection Lrefpndf
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description IL3-diff FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured differential current amplitude phase IL3 IL1-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL1 IL2-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL2 IL3-bias FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Measured bias current amplitude phase IL3 4.3.2.10...
Page 559 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.3.3.2 Function block Figure 285: Function block 4.3.3.3 Functionality The numerical stabilized low-impedance restricted earth-fault protection function LREFPNDF for a two-winding transformer is based on the numerically stabilized differential current principle. No external stabilizing resistor or non-linear resistor are required.
Page 560 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H value of the difference between the residual current, that is, the sum of the fundamental frequency components of the phase currents I_A, I_B and I_C, and the neutral current. The directional differential current ID_COSPHI is the product of the differential current and cosφ.
Page 561 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 287: Operating characteristics of the stabilized earth-fault protection function Figure 288: Setting range of the operating characteristics for the stabilized differential current principle of the earth-fault protection function Operate value setting is used for defining the characteristics of the function. The differential current value required for tripping is constant at the stabilizing current values 0.0 <...
Page 562 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Second harmonic blocking This module compares the ratio of the current second harmonic (I _2H) and I Start value 2.H . If the ratio (I the set value _2H / I ) value exceeds the set value, the BLK2H output is activated.
Page 563 1MRS757644 H Protection functions normally applied when the transformer is earthed solidly or through low-impedance resistor (NER). LREFPNDF can be also applied on the delta side of the transformer if an earthing transformer (zig-zag transformer) is used there. In LREFPNDF, the difference of the fundamental component of all three phase currents and the neutral current is provided to the differential element to detect the earth fault in the transformer winding based on the numerical stabilized differential current...
Page 564 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 289: Connection of the current transformers of Type 1. The connected phase currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an external earth-fault situation. Both earthings are inside the area to be protected. Figure 290: Connection of the current transformers of Type 1. The connected phase currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an external earth-fault situation.
Page 565 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 291: Connection of the current transformers of Type 2. The phase currents and the neutral current have equal directions at an external earth-fault situation. Phase earthing is inside and neutral earthing is outside the area to be protected. Figure 292: Connection of the current transformers of Type 2.
Page 566 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H zone of protection a = 0 b = 0 b = 0 c = 0 For external fault Reference is Neutral Current Operate for Restrain for internal fault external fault Figure 293: Current flow in all the CTs for an external fault zone of protection a = 0...
Page 567 1MRS757644 H Protection functions LREFPNDF does not respond to phase-to-phase faults either, as in this case the fault current flows between the two line CTs and so the neutral CT does not experience this fault current. Blocking based on the second harmonic of the neutral current The transformer magnetizing inrush currents occur when the transformer is energized after a period of de-energization.
Page 568 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.3.3.7 Settings Table 495: LREFPNDF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate value 5.0...50.0 Operate value Table 496: LREFPNDF Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Minimum operate 40...300000 Minimum operate time time...
Page 569: High-Impedance Based Restricted Earth-Fault Protection Hrefpdif
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.3.3.9 Technical data Table 500: LREFPNDF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 ±2.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x I Start time , Minimum Typical Maximum Operate value 37 ms = 2.0 ×...
Page 570 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.3.4.3 Functionality The high-impedance based restricted earth-fault protection function HREFPDIF is used for the restricted earth-fault protection of generators and power transformers. The function starts when the differential neutral current exceeds the set limit. HREFPDIF operates with the DT characteristic. The function contains a blocking functionality.
Page 571 1MRS757644 H Protection functions program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global Blocking mode . setting Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
Page 572 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Stabilizing Resistor High impedance protection (HREFPDIF) Figure 297: Connection scheme for the restricted earth-fault protection according to the high-impedance principle High-impedance principle High-impedance principle is stable for all types of faults outside the zone of protection. The stabilization is obtained by a stabilizing resistor in the differential circuit.
Page 573 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 298: High-impedance principle The stability of the protection is based on the use of the stabilizing resistor (Rs) and the fact that the impedance of the CT secondary quickly decreases as the CT saturates. The magnetization reactance of a fully saturated CT goes to zero and the impedance is formed only by the resistance of the winding (R ) and lead resistance The CT saturation causes a differential current which now has two paths to flow:...
Page 574 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The whole scheme, that is, the stabilizing resistor, voltage-dependent resistor and wiring, must be adequately maintained (operation- and insulation-tested regularly) to be able to withstand the high-voltage pulses which appear during an internal fault throughout the lifetime of the equipment. Otherwise, during a fault within the zone of protection, any flashover in the CT secondary circuits or in any other part of the scheme may prevent a correct operation of the high-impedance differential function.
Page 575 1MRS757644 H Protection functions (Equation 86) the highest through-fault current in primary amps. The highest earth-fault or kmax short circuit current during the out-of-zone fault. the turns ratio of the CT the secondary internal resistance of the CT in ohms the resistance (maximum of R ) of the CT secondary circuit in ohms The current transformers must be able to force enough current to operate the...
Page 576 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The actual sensitivity of the protection is affected by the IED setting, the magnetizing currents of the parallel connected CTs and the shunting effect of the voltage-dependent resistor ( VDR). The value of the primary current I at which prim the IED operates at a certain setting can be calculated with the formula...
Page 577 1MRS757644 H Protection functions the rated accuracy limit factor corresponding to the rated burden S the rated secondary current of the CT the secondary internal resistance of the CT the volt-amp rating of the CT Equation 87 The formulas are based on choosing the CTs according to which results an absolutely stable scheme.
Page 578 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.3.4.8 Setting examples Example 1 Figure 300: Restricted earth-fault protection of a transformer The data for the protected power transformer are: = 20 MVA = 11 kV The longest distance of the secondary circuit is 50 m (the whole loop is 100 m) and the area of the cross section is 10 mm / (√3 ·...
Page 579 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 12600 0 47 0 18 × ≈ = 2 · U = 68 V (required value). Equation As mentioned earlier, I = 0.5 · I gives a realistic value for I prim . If I = 0 and I = m ·...
Page 580 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H = 770 A = 6 · I = 6 · 770 A = 4620 A kmax In this example, the CT type is KOFD 12 A 21 with: = 1000 A (value given by the manufacturer). CT_1n = 1 A (value given by the manufacturer).
Page 581 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.3.4.9 Signals Table 502: HREFPDIF Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Differential current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 503: HREFPDIF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.3.4.10...
Page 582: High-Impedance Differential Protection Hixpdif
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.3.4.12 Technical data Table 508: HREFPDIF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Start time , Minimum Typical Maximum Operate value = 2.0 ×...
Page 583 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.3.5.2 Function block Figure 302: Function block 4.3.5.3 Functionality The high-impedance differential protection function HIxPDIF is a general differential protection. It provides a phase-segregated short circuit protection for the busbar. However, the function can also be used for providing generator, motor, transformer and reactor protection.
Page 584 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 303: Functional module diagram The module diagram illustrates all the phases of the function. Functionality for phases A, B and C is identical. All three phases have independent settings. Level detector The module compares differential currents I_A calculated by the peak-to-peak Operate value .
Page 585 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The activation of the BLOCK input resets Timer and deactivates the START and OPERATE outputs. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration > System >...
Page 586 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 304: Phase-segregated bus differential protection based on high-impedance principle CT secondary winding resistances (R ) and connection wire resistances (R /2) are Figure 305 also shown in Figure 305 demonstrates a simplified circuit consisting only of one incoming and outgoing feeder.
Page 587 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 305: Equivalent circuit when there is no fault or CT saturation When there is no fault, the CT secondary currents and their emf voltages, E and E , are opposite and the protection relay measuring branch has no voltage or current. If an in-zone fault occurs, the secondary currents have the same direction.
Page 588 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The protection relay must not operate during the saturation. This is achieved by increasing the relay impedance by using the stabilizing resistor (R ) which forces the majority of the differential current to flow through the saturated CT. As a result, the relay operation is avoided, that is, the relay operation is stabilized against the CT saturation at through-fault current.
Page 589 1MRS757644 H Protection functions that flow into the protection zone, that is, currents with positive value, must be equal to currents that flow out of the protection zone, that is, currents with negative value, at any instant of time. Figure 309 shows an example of a phase segregated single busbar protection employing high-impedance differential protection.
Page 590 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H When the bus coupler is in the open position, each section of the busbar handles the current flow independently, that is, the instantaneous incoming current is equal to the total instantaneous outgoing current and the difference current is negligible. The difference current is no longer zero with a fault in the busbar and the protection operates.
Page 591 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 311: Example for busbar differential protection Bus data: 20 kV 2000 A 25 kA kmax 10 feeders per protected zone including bus coupler and incomer. CT data is assumed to be: 2000/1 A 15.75 Ω 436 V <7 mA (at U 1Ω...
Page 592 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 25000 15 75 Ω Ω ≈ 209 37 2000 (Equation 94) In this case, the requirement for the current transformer knee point voltage is fulfilled because U > 2U The magnetizing curve of the CT is assumed to be linear. The magnetizing current at the stabilizing voltage can be estimated as: ⋅...
Page 593 1MRS757644 H Protection functions ≥ ≈ 5900 Ω (Equation 101) Equation 102 Equation 103 Based on , the need for voltage-dependent resistor is checked. 25000 5900 Ω 15 75 Ω 1 00 Ω ≈ 74 0 2000 (Equation 102) ˘ 2 436 74000 16 0...
Page 594 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 512: HICPDIF Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode Table 513: HIAPDIF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start Table 514: HIBPDIF Output signals...
Page 595 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 519: HIBPDIF Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate value 1.0...200.0 Operate value, per- centage of the nominal current Minimum operate 20...300000 Minimum operate time time Table 520: HIBPDIF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 596 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 526: HIBPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time HIBPDIF Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Table 527: HICPDIF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit...
Page 597: High-Impedance/Flux-Balance Based Differential Protection For Motors Mhzpdif
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.3.6 High-impedance/flux-balance based differential protection for motors MHZPDIF 4.3.6.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number High-impedance/flux-balance based MHZPDIF 3dIHi>M 87MH differential protection for motors 4.3.6.2 Function block Figure 312: Function block 4.3.6.3 Functionality The high-impedance/flux-balance based differential protection for motors function...
Page 598 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Level detector Operate This module compares the three-phase differential currents to the set value . If any of the differential currents ID_A, ID_B or ID_C exceeds the set Operate value , the Level detector module sends an enable signal to the Timer module to start the definite timer (DT).
Page 599 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 314: Three-phase differential protection for motors based on highimpedance principle In case of an internal fault, the fault current cannot circulate through the CTs. It flows through the measuring branch, and the protection operates. A partial CT saturation can occur in case of an internal fault, but the undistorted part of the current waveform causes the protection to operate.
Page 600 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Flux-balancing principle In a measuring configuration for the three-phase differential currents according to the flux-balancing principle, no stabilizing resistors are needed. The configuration, however, requires the use of core balance current transformers. The compared currents, the one at the line end and the other at the neutral end, are both measured by the same core balance current transformer.
Page 601 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.3.6.6 Recommendations for current transformers High-impedance principle The sensitivity and reliability of the protection depend on the characteristics of the current transformers. The CTs must have an identical transformation ratio. It is recommended that all current transformers have an equal burden and characteristics and that they are of the same type.
Page 602 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The current transformers must be able to force enough current to operate the relay through the differential circuit during a fault condition inside the protection zone. To ensure this, the knee point voltage U should be at least two times higher than the stabilizing voltage U The required knee point voltage U of the current transformer is calculated using...
Page 603 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The magnetizing current per current transformer at the U voltage The primary current at which the protection is to start prim Operate value setting The value of the The leakage current flowing through the VDR at the U voltage The turn ratio of the current transformer The number of current transformers included in the protection per phase (=2)
Page 604 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H × ≈ × (Equation 112) The maximum fault current inside the zone, in primary amperes kmaxin The turns ration of the CT The internal resistance of the CT in ohms The resistance of the longest loop of the CT secondary circuit, in ohms The resistance of the stabilized resistor, in ohms The peak voltage û, which includes the CT saturation, is estimated with the formula (given by P.Mathews, 1955)
Page 605 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 530: Protected generator values Quantity Value 8 MVA 6 kV 770 A 4620 A (6 × I ) out-of-zone fault kmax 9.24 kA (12 × I ) in-zone fault kmaxin Table 531: Assumed CT data Quantity Value 1000/1 A...
Page 606 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Ω 0 00865 ⋅ ≈ 1 73 Ω (Equation 116) Equation 106 First the stabilizing voltage is calculated based on 6 770 ⋅ 15 3 1 73 78 7 ⋅ Ω Ω ≈ 1000 (Equation 117) In this case the requirement for the current transformer knee point voltage is fulfilled because U >...
Page 607 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 1000 0 020 2 0 0085 ⋅ + ⋅ ≈ prim (Equation 123) The power of the stabilizing resistor is calculated as follows. ≥ ≈ 3900 Ω (Equation 124) Equation 112 Equation 113 Based on , the need for voltage dependent resistor is checked.
Page 608 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description ID_C REAL 0. 0 Differential current amplitude (DFT) phase C BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode Table 533: MHZPDIF Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start...
Page 609: Unbalance Protection
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description ID_C FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential current phase C MHZPDIF Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.3.6.11 Technical data Table 538: MHZPDIF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current measured: f ±2 ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 x I Operate time ,...
Page 610 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.4.1.2 Function block Figure 319: Function block 4.4.1.3 Functionality The negative-sequence overcurrent protection function NSPTOC is used for increasing sensitivity to detect single-phase and phase-to-phase faults or unbalanced loads due to, for example, broken conductors or unsymmetrical feeder voltages.
Page 611 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Start value is multiplied by the set module. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the set Start value Mult . Start value or Start value Mult The protection relay does not accept the Start value setting setting if the product of the settings exceeds the range.
Page 612 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the OPERATE output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
Page 613 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.4.1.7 Settings Table 541: NSPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.01...5.00 0.01 0.30 Start value Start value Mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scal- ing the start value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier...
Page 614 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer program- mable curve Table 544: NSPTOC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 615: Phase Discontinuity Protection Pdnsptoc
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.4.1.10 Technical revision history Table 547: NSPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Minimum and default values changed to 40 Operate delay time setting ms for the Step value changed from 0.05 to 0.01 for the Time multiplier setting Internal improvement Internal Improvements...
Page 616 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 322: Functional module diagram The I module calculates the ratio of the negative and positive sequence current. It reports the calculated value to the level detector. Level detector The level detector compares the calculated ratio of the negative and positive- Start value .
Page 617 1MRS757644 H Protection functions is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block OPERATE output" mode, the function operates normally but the OPERATE output is not activated. 4.4.2.5 Application In three-phase distribution and subtransmission network applications the phase...
Page 618 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 324: Three-phase current quantities during the broken conductor fault in phase A with the ratio of negative-sequence and positive-sequence currents 4.4.2.6 Signals Table 548: PDNSPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Positive sequence current SIGNAL Negative sequence current...
Page 619 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.4.2.7 Settings Table 550: PDNSPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 10...100 Start value Operate delay time 100...30000 Operate delay time Table 551: PDNSPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default...
Page 620: Phase Reversal Protection Prevptoc
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.4.2.10 Technical revision history Table 555: PDNSPTOC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Internal improvement Internal improvement Internal improvement 4.4.3 Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC 4.4.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Phase reversal protection PREVPTOC...
Page 621 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 326: Functional module diagram Level detector The level detector compares the negative-sequence current to the set Start value . If Start value , the level detector sends an enabling signal the I value exceeds the set to the timer module.
Page 622 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 557: PREVPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.4.3.7 Settings Table 558: PREVPTOC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.05...1.00 0.01 0.75 Start value Operate delay time 100...60000 Operate delay time Table 559: PREVPTOC Non group settings (Basic)
Page 623: Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection For Machines Mnsptoc
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × f , where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,… 4.4.3.10 Technical revision history Table 562: PREVPTOC Technical revision history 46R Technical revision history...
Page 624 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 328: Functional module diagram Level detector Start value setting. If The calculated negative-sequence current is compared to the the measured value exceeds the Start value setting, the function activates the timer module. Timer Once activated, the timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of Operating curve type , the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT.
Page 625 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Operate delay time and Reset are selected, the functionality is only affected by the delay time settings. The protection relay provides two user-programmable IDMT characteristics curves, "Inv. curve A" and "Inv. curve B". Current-based inverse definite minimum time curve (IDMT) In inverse-time modes, the operate time depends on the momentary value of the current: the higher the current, the shorter the operate time.
Page 626 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 329: MNSPTOC Inverse Curve A Start value setting, the reset time If the negative sequence current drops below the is defined as:   = ×     (Equation 131) t[s] Reset time in seconds Cooling time percentage of start time elapse ( START_DUR...
Page 627 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Start value Rated current Figure 330: MNSPTOC Inverse Curve B Start If the fault disappears, the negative-sequence current drops below the value setting and the START output is deactivated. The function does not reset Cooling time setting. instantaneously.
Page 628 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 1.7 times the previous load in each healthy phase and zero current in the open phase. The negative-sequence currents flow through the stator windings inducing negative-sequence voltage in the rotor windings. This can result in a high rotor current that damages the rotor winding.
Page 629 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 566: MNSPTOC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Maximum operate 500000...7200000 1000 1000000 Max operate time time regardless of the inverse characteris- Minimum operate 100...120000 Minimum operate...
Page 630: Voltage Protection
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Characteristic Value Retardation time <35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Operate time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 631 1MRS757644 H Protection functions PHPTOV includes both definite time ( DT) and inverse definite minimum time ( IDMT) characteristics for the delay of the trip. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired. 4.5.1.4 Operation principle Operation setting.
Page 632 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. Depending on the value of Operating curve type , the time characteristics are selected according to DT the set or IDMT. Chapter 11.3.1 For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves, see IDMT curves for overvoltage protection in this manual.
Page 633 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 333: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. Operate signal is based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset= “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.
Page 634 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration > System > Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program.
Page 635 1MRS757644 H Protection functions It is essential to provide power frequency overvoltage protection, in the form of time delayed element, either IDMT or DT to prevent equipment damage. 4.5.1.7 Signals Table 573: PHPTOV Input signals Name Type Default Description U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase to earth volt- age A or phase to...
Page 636 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 576: PHPTOV Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time 1=Freeze Op timer reset 2=Decrease Op tim-...
Page 637: Single-Phase Overvoltage Protection Phaptov
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.1.9 Monitored data Table 579: PHPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time PHPTOV Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.5.1.10 Technical data Table 580: PHPTOV Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 638 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.5.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Single-phase overvoltage protec- PHAPTOV U_A> 59_A tion, secondary side 4.5.2.2 Function block Figure 334: Function block 4.5.2.3 Functionality The single-phase overvoltage protection function PHAPTOV is applied on power system elements, such as generators, transformers, motors and power lines, to protect the system from excessive voltages that could damage the insulation and cause insulation breakdown.
Page 639 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Start value setting, the Level detector activates higher than the set value of the Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary the Timer. The Start value setting. After oscillations if the input signal slightly differs from the leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition has to be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return to the hysteresis area.
Page 640 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 582: Reset time functionality when IDMT operation time curve selected Reset functionality Setting Type of Setting Type of Setting Reset reset curve time reset delay time Instantaneous Operation timer “Immediate” Setting has no Setting has no reset is “Reset instan- effect...
Page 641 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Example Figure 336: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes Figure 336 Type of reset curve shows the operate signal based on settings Type of time reset = “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of = “Def time reset” and other reset modes is also presented.
Page 642 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the Monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration >...
Page 643 1MRS757644 H Protection functions rise to a substantial change in voltage because of the large voltage regulation inherent in a typical alternator. • Sudden loss of load due to the tripping of outgoing feeders, leaving the generator isolated or feeding a very small load, can cause a sudden rise in the terminal voltage due to the trapped field flux and overspeed.
Page 644 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 587: PHAPTOV Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 1=Immediate Selection of reset curve type 2=Def time reset Type of time reset 1=Freeze Op timer Selection of time 1=Freeze Op timer reset 2=Decrease Op tim-...
Page 645: Three-Phase Undervoltage Protection Phptuv
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.2.9 Monitored data Table 590: PHAPTOV Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description START_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of start time / op- erate time PHAPTOV Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.5.2.10 Technical data Table 591: PHAPTOV Technical data Characteristic Value...
Page 646 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.5.3.2 Function block Figure 337: Function block 4.5.3.3 Functionality The three-phase undervoltage protection function PHPTUV is used to disconnect from the network devices, for example electric motors, which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage conditions. PHPTUV includes a settable value for the detection of undervoltage either in a single phase, two phases or three phases.
Page 647 1MRS757644 H Protection functions For the voltage IDMT mode of operation, the used IDMT curve equations contain Curve Sat relative setting is used for preventing discontinuity characteristics. The unwanted operation. Curve For more detailed description on IDMT curves and usage of Sat Relative setting, see Chapter 11.3.2 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection...
Page 648 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 592: Reset time functionality when IDMT operation time curve selected Reset functionality Setting Type of Setting Type of Setting Reset reset curve time reset delay time Instantaneous Operation timer “Immediate” Setting has no Setting has no reset is “Reset instan- effect...
Page 649 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 339: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. Operate signal is based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset= “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT operate times.
Page 650 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program. The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is Blocking mode setting.
Page 651 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.3.7 Signals Table 594: PHPTUV Input signals Name Type Default Description U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase to earth volt- age A or phase to phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL Phase to earth volt- age B or phase to phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL...
Page 652 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 598: PHPTUV Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Num of start pha- 1=1 out of 3 Number of phases 1=1 out of 3 required for oper- 2=2 out of 3 ate activation...
Page 653: Single-Phase Undervoltage Protection Phaptuv
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.3.10 Technical data Table 601: PHPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Start time , = 0.9 × set Start Minimum Typical...
Page 654 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.5.4.2 Function block Figure 340: Function block 4.5.4.3 Functionality The single-phase undervoltage protection function PHAPTUV is used to disconnect damaged devices from the network. These can be, for example, electric motors which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage conditions. The function contains a blocking functionality.
Page 655 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Curve Sat For more detailed description on IDMT curves and usage of Relative setting, see the IDMT curves for undervoltage protection section in this manual. The Level detector contains a low-level blocking functionality for cases where one of the measured voltages is below the desired level.
Page 656 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 342: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes Figure 342 shows the operate signal based on settings Type of reset curve = “Def time reset” and Type of time reset= “Freeze Op timer”. The effect of other reset modes is also presented.
Page 657 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration > System > Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the relay program.
Page 658 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H PHAPTUV prevents sensitive equipment from running under conditions that could cause overheating and thus shorten their life time expectancy. In many cases, PHAPTUV is a useful function in circuits for local or remote automation processes in the power system.
Page 659 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 609: PHAPTUV Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Curve parameter A 0.005...200.000 1.000 Parameter A for customer program- mable curve Curve parameter B 0.50...100.00 1.00 Parameter B for...
Page 660: Residual Overvoltage Protection Rovptov
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.5.4.10 Technical data Table 612: PHAPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Start Start time , = 0.9 ×...
Page 661 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.5.4 Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of ROVPTOV can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 662 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Reset delay time , the operate timer resets and the START output is value set by deactivated. The timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operation time. The value is available in the monitored data view.
Page 663 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 614: ROVPTOV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.5.5.7 Settings Table 615: ROVPTOV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...1.000 0.001 0.030 Residual overvolt- age start value Operate delay time 40...300000 Operate delay time...
Page 664: Negative-Sequence Overvoltage Protection Nsptov
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Characteristic Value Start time , = 2 × set Start Minimum Typical Maximum Fault value 48 ms 51 ms 54 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0.96 Retardation time <35 ms Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 665 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, the definite timer or the function itself, if desired. 4.5.6.4 Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On"...
Page 666 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.5.6.5 Application A continuous or temporary voltage unbalance can appear in the network for various reasons. The voltage unbalance mainly occurs due to broken conductors or asymmetrical loads and is characterized by the appearance of a negative-sequence component of the voltage.
Page 667 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.6.7 Settings Table 623: NSPTOV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...1.000 0.001 0.030 Start value Operate delay time 40...120000 Operate delay time Table 624: NSPTOV Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 668: Positive-Sequence Undervoltage Protection Psptuv
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Characteristic Value Operate time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n × f , where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,… 4.5.6.10 Technical revision history Table 628: 47 Technical revision history...
Page 669 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.7.4 Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of PSPTUV can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 670 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.5.7.5 Application PSPTUV can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded generation when network faults like short circuits or phase-to-earth faults in a transmission or a distribution line cause a potentially dangerous situations for the power station.
Page 671 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 630: PSPTUV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.5.7.7 Settings Table 631: PSPTUV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value 0.010...1.200 0.001 0.500 Start value Operate delay time 40...120000 Operate delay time Table 632: PSPTUV Group settings (Advanced)
Page 672: Overexcitation Protection Oepvph
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.5.7.9 Technical data Table 636: PSPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Start time , Minimum Typical Maximum Start...
Page 673 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.8.2 Function block Figure 349: Function block 4.5.8.3 Functionality The overexcitation protection function OEPVPH is used to protect generators and power transformers against an excessive flux density and saturation of the magnetic core. The function calculates the U/f ratio (volts/hertz) proportional to the excitation level of the generator or transformer and compares this value to the setting limit.
Page 674 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H U/f calculation This module calculates the U/f ratio, that is, the excitation level from the internal induced voltage (E) and frequency. The actual measured voltage (U ) deviates from the internal induced voltage (E), a value the equipment has to withstand. This voltage compensation is based on the load current (I ) and the leakage reactance (X ) of the equipment.
Page 675 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Volt Max continuous ⋅ (Equation 133) excitation level (U/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu internal induced voltage (emf) measured frequency nominal phase-to-phase voltage nominal frequency If the input frequency (f ) is less than 20 percent of the nominal frequency (f ), the calculation of the excitation level is disabled and forced to zero value.
Page 676 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H The T_ENARESTART output indicates in seconds the duration for which the BLK_RESTART output still remains active. The value is available in the Monitored data view. Timer calculates the start duration value START_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the Monitored data view.
Page 677 1MRS757644 H Protection functions reoccurs during the reset time, the operation calculation is made based on the effects of the period when START was previously active. This is intended to allow an operating condition to occur in less time to account for the heating effects from the previous active start period.
Page 678 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H t(s) Operate time in seconds Excitation level (U/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu Time multiplier setting Equation 135 The constant "60" in converts time from minutes to seconds. Table 639: Parameters a, b and c for different IDMT curves Operating curve type setting OvExt IDMT Crv1...
Page 679 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 0 18 − (Equation 136) t(s) Operate time in seconds Constant delay setting in milliseconds Excitation value (U/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu Time multiplier setting Figure 353: Operating time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve 4 ("OvExt IDMT Crv4") for different values of the Time multiplier setting when the Constant delay is 800 milliseconds The activation of the OPERATE output activates the BLK_RESTART output.
Page 680 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H If the excitation level increases above the set value when BLK_RESTART is active, the OPERATE output is activated immediately. If the excitation level increases above the set value when BLK_RESTART is not active but COOL_ACTIVE is active, the OPERATE output is not activated instantly. In this case, the remaining part of the cooling timer affects the calculation of the operate Figure 354 timer as shown in...
Page 681 1MRS757644 H Protection functions can result in overexcitation if the voltage-regulating system maintains a normal voltage. Overexcitation protection for the transformer is generally provided by the generator overexcitation protection, which uses the VTs connected to the generator terminals. The curves that define the generator and transformer V/Hz limits must be coordinated properly to protect both equipment.
Page 682 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H − ⋅ leak (Equation 139) E = 11500∠0°+ (5600∠-63.57°- 5600∠176.42°) · (0.170378∠90°) = 12490 V The excitation level M of the machine is calculated. 12490 49 98 Excitation level M = 1 1359 11000 1 00 ⋅...
Page 683 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 355: Operating curve of "OvExt IDMT Crv2" based on the settings specified in example 3. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text. If the excitation level stays at 1.26, the operation occurs after 26360 Figure 355 milliseconds as per the marked dot in .
Page 684 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 356: Operating curve of “OvExt IDMT Crv4” based on the specified settings. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text. If the excitation level stays at 1.25, the operation occurs after 15200 milliseconds.
Page 685 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Default Description U_B_BC SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age B or phase-to- phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age C or phase-to- phase voltage CA SIGNAL Positive-phase se- quence voltage SIGNAL Measured frequency BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal Table 641: OEPVPH Output signals...
Page 686 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 643: OEPVPH Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Mode 1=on Off / On 5=off Cooling time 5...10000 Time required to cool the machine Constant delay 100...120000 Parameter con- stant delay Maximum operate 500000...10000000 ms...
Page 687: Low-Voltage Ride-Through Protection Lvrtptuv
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.8.10 Technical data Table 646: OEPVPH Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±2.5% of the set value or 0.01 × Ub/f Start time , Frequency change: Typically 200 ms (±20 ms) Voltage change: 100 ms (±20 ms)
Page 688 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H national grid codes. The LVRT curve can be defined accurately according to the requirements by setting the appropriate time-voltage coordinates. The function contains a blocking functionality. LVRTPTUV can be blocked with the BLOCK input. Blocking resets timers and outputs. 4.5.9.4 Operation principle Operation setting.
Page 689 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Voltage start value , If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, voltage restores above before OPERATE is activated, the function does not reset until maximum recovery time under consideration has elapsed, that is, START output remains active. LVRT curve is defined using time-voltage settings coordinates.
Page 690 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 647: Settings for example A and B Settings Curve A Curve B Voltage start value 0.9 · Un 0.9 · Un Active coordinates Voltage level 1 0.2 · Un 0 · Un Recovery time 1 500 ms 150 ms Voltage level 2...
Page 691 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 361: Typical example of operation of LVRTPTUV function Activation of the BLOCK input resets the timers and deactivates the function outputs. 4.5.9.5 Application Distributed generation, mainly wind and solar farms, are rapidly increasing due to liberalized markets (deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources of energy.
Page 692 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Voltage level 1 to • Area B defines the linear growth recovery voltage level from Voltage level 2 in a time period from Recovery time 1 to Recovery time 2 . Voltage level 3 is defined to same •...
Page 693 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Default Description U_A_CA SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age C or phase-to- phase voltage CA SIGNAL Positive phase se- quence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode Table 649: LVRTPTUV Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 694 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage level 5 0.00...1.20 0.01 0.90 5th voltage coordi- nate for defining LVRT curve Voltage level 6 0.00...1.20 0.01 0.90 6th voltage coordi- nate for defining LVRT curve Voltage level 7 0.00...1.20 0.01 0.90...
Page 695: Voltage Vector Shift Protection Vvsppam
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.9.9 Technical data Table 653: LVRTPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U Start time , Typically 40 ms Recovery time setting Reset time Based on maximum value of...
Page 696 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.5.10.4 Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are “On” and “Off”. The operation of VVSPPAM can be described by using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
Page 697 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 365: Vector shift during Loss of Mains Pulse timer Once the Pulse timer is activated, it activates the OPERATE output. The pulse length of OPERATE is fixed to 100 ms. The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the OPERATE binary output and resets the timer.
Page 698 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H To avoid these technical challenges, protection is needed to disconnect the distributed generation once it is electrically isolated from the main grid supply. Various techniques are used for detecting Loss of Mains. However, the present function focuses on voltage vector shift. The vector shift detection guarantees fast and reliable detection of mains failure in almost all operational conditions when a distributed generation unit is running in parallel with the mains supply, but in certain cases this may fail.
Page 699 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.5.10.6 Signals Table 654: VVSPPAM Input signals Name Type Default Description U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age A or phase-to- phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age B or phase-to- phase voltage BC U_C_CA SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age C or phase-to- phase voltage CA BLOCK...
Page 700: Frequency Protection
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 659: VVSPPAM Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Phase supervision 8=Pos sequence Monitored voltage 7=Ph A + B + C phase 8=Pos sequence 4.5.10.8 Monitored data Table 660: VVSPPAM Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 701 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.6.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Frequency protection FRPFRQ f>/f<,df/dt 4.6.1.2 Function block Figure 366: Function block 4.6.1.3 Functionality The frequency protection function FRPFRQ is used to protect network components against abnormal frequency conditions.
Page 702 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H OPERATE Freq>/< START detection OPR_OFRQ OPR_UFRQ Operate logic ST_OFRQ ST_UFRQ df/dt dF/dt detection OPR_FRG ST_FRG Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 367: Functional module diagram Freq>/< detection The frequency detection module includes an overfrequency or underfrequency Operation mode setting. detection based on the Start value In the “Freq>”...
Page 703 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 662: Operation modes for operation logic Operation mode Description Freq< The function operates independently as the underfrequency ("Freq<") protection function. When the measured frequency Start value Freq< setting, the is below the set value of the module activates the outputs.
Page 704 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Operation mode Description Freq< + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods. When the measured frequency is below the set Start value Freq< setting, the frequency gradi- value of the ent protection is enabled. After the frequency has dropped below the set value, the frequency gradient is compared to Start value df/dt setting.
Page 705 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Operation mode Description Freq< OR df/dt A parallel operation between the protection methods is en- abled. The output is activated when either of the START measured values of the protection module exceeds its set value. Detailed information about the active module is avail- able at the outputs.
Page 706 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration > System > Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program.
Page 707 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.6.1.6 Signals Table 664: FRPFRQ Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Measured frequency dF/dt SIGNAL Rate of change of fre- quency BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode Table 665: FRPFRQ Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 708 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate Tm Freq 80...200000 Operate delay time for frequency Operate Tm df/dt 120...200000 Operate delay time for frequency rate of change Table 667: FRPFRQ Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step...
Page 709: Load-Shedding And Restoration Lshdpfrq
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.6.1.10 Technical revision history Table 671: FRPFRQ Technical revision history Technical revision Change Step value changed from 0.001 to 0.0001 for Start value Freq> and Start value Freq< settings. df/dt setting step changed from 0.005 ×Fn /s to 0.0025 ×Fn /s. Internal improvement.
Page 710 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Once the frequency has stabilized, LSHDPFRQ can restore the load that is shed during the frequency disturbance. The restoration is possible manually or automatically. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.
Page 711 1MRS757644 H Protection functions ST_FRQ output. When the underfrequency timer has reached the value set by Operate Tm Freq , the OPR_FRQ output is activated if the underfrequency condition still persists. If the frequency becomes normal before the module operates, the Reset delay time , reset timer is activated.
Page 712 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Frequency Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s 50 Hz Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 49 Hz 48.75 Hz Time [s] ST_FRG...
Page 713 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Frequency Start value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Start value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s Operate Tm df/dt = 500ms 50 Hz Operate Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 49 Hz Time [s] ST_FRG 500ms...
Page 714 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Restoring mode Description Disabled Load restoration is disabled. Auto In the “Auto” mode, input frequency is continuously compared to the Restore start Val setting. The restore detection module includes a timer with the DT characteristics. Upon detection of restoring, the operation timer activates the output.
Page 715 1MRS757644 H Protection functions that the operating frequency remains approximately at the nominal frequency value by a small margin. The safe margin of operation is usually less than ±0.5 Hz. The system frequency stability is one of the main concerns in the transmission and distribution network operation and control.
Page 716 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Frequency [Hz] 50 Hz 48.8 Hz Time [s] START OPERATE ST_REST RESTORE Set Restore delay time Restore timer Timer Timer Timer starts suspended continues Figure 372: Operation of the load-shedding function Power system protection by load-shedding The decision on the amount of load that is required to be shed is taken through the measurement of frequency and the rate of change of frequency (df/dt).
Page 717 1MRS757644 H Protection functions time for the underfrequency can be set from a few seconds to a few fractions of a second stepwise from a higher frequency value to a lower frequency value. Table 672: Setting for a five-step underfrequency operation Load-shedding steps Start value Freq setting Operate Tm Freq setting...
Page 718 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.6.2.6 Signals Table 675: LSHDPFRQ Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Measured frequency dF/dt SIGNAL Rate of change of fre- quency BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode BLK_REST BOOLEAN 0=False Block restore MAN_RESTORE BOOLEAN...
Page 719: Impedance Protection
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate Tm Freq 80...200000 Time delay to op- erate for under fre- quency stage Operate Tm df/dt 120...200000 Time delay to oper- ate for df/dt stage Restore start Val 0.800...1.200 0.001 0.998...
Page 720: Three-Phase Underexcitation Protection Uexpdis
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Impedance protection 4.7.1 Three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS 4.7.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase underexcitation pro- UEXPDIS X< tection 4.7.1.2 Function block Figure 373: Function block 4.7.1.3 Functionality The three-phase underexcitation protection function UEXPDIS is used to protect the synchronous machine against the underexcitation or loss of excitation condition.
Page 721 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 374: Functional module diagram Impedance calculation This module calculates the apparent impedance based on the selected voltages and currents. The Measurement mode and Phase Sel for Z Clc settings determine Measurement mode is set to which voltages and currents are to be used.
Page 722 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H If the polarity of the voltage signals is opposite to the normal polarity, the Voltage reversal to "Yes", which rotates the correction can be done by setting impedance vector by 180 degrees. If the magnitude of the voltage is less than 0.05 · U , the calculated impedance is not reliable and the impedance calculation is disabled.
Page 723 1MRS757644 H Protection functions External loss detection The module checks the status information of the excitation system. It is activated External Los Det Ena setting is set to "Enable". The total loss of excitation when the current or a failure in the excitation system is indicated by connecting the external binary signal to the EXT_LOS_DET input.
Page 724 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Q (Reactive power) p.u. Motor Generator Over-Excitation P (Active power) p.u. Under-Excitation =0.2 =0.0 Where, AB= Field current limit BC= Stator current limit CD= End region heating limit of stator. Due to leakage flux BH= Possible active power limit due to turbine output power limitation EF= Steady -state limit without AVR Figure 376: Capability curve of a synchronous generator UEXPDIS protects the synchronous machines against an unstable operation due to...
Page 725 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The setting parameters of the off-set mho circle are to be given in pu values. The base impedance (Z ) in ohms is: (Equation 142) rated (phase-to-phase) voltage in kV rated power of the protected machine in MVA he corresponding calculation to convert ohms to pu values is: (Equation 143) pu value...
Page 726 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.7.1.6 Signals Table 684: UEXPDIS Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age A or phase-to- phase voltage AB U_B_BC SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age B or phase-to- phase voltage BC...
Page 727 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 687: UEXPDIS Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off External Los Det 1=Enable Enable external ex- 0=Disable citation loss detec- 1=Enable tion Voltage reversal 0=No Rotate voltage sig- 0=No...
Page 728: Power Protection
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Z_ANGLE_CA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Phase-to-phase C-A im- pedance phase angle Z1_AMPL FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 Positive sequence im- pedance amplitude Z1_ANGLE FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Positive sequence im- pedance phase angle UEXPDIS Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked...
Page 729 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.8.1.2 Function block Figure 378: Function block 4.8.1.3 Functionality The underpower protection function DUPPDPR is used for protecting generators and prime movers against the effects of very low power outputs or reverse power condition. The function operates when the measured active power falls below the set value. The operating characteristics are according to definite time DT.
Page 730 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H asymmetry in currents or voltages and corresponds to the real load of the prime mover of the generator. Table 691: Power calculation Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsA, PhsB, PhsC ⋅ ⋅ Arone ⋅ − ⋅ Pos Seq = ⋅...
Page 731 1MRS757644 H Protection functions If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the protection relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended (default). Measurement mode , the power calculation calculates active Depending on the set power, reactive power and apparent power values from the available set of measurements.
Page 732 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H delay time , the OPERATE output is activated. In a drop-off situation, that is, if the underpower condition disappears before the operation delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time , the operation timer resets and the START output is deactivated.
Page 733 1MRS757644 H Protection functions If the measuring errors are not compensated for, the underpower setting should not be lower than the sum of the current-measuring and voltage- measuring errors. For example, if the error of the current-measuring device is 2% and that of the voltage-measuring device is 1%, the minimum setting is (2 + 1)% = 4.8.1.6 Signals...
Page 734 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 695: DUPPDPR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation On/Off 1=on 5=off Table 696: DUPPDPR Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Measurement 3=Pos Seq Selection of power 1=PhsA, PhsB, PhsC mode...
Page 735: Reverse Power-Directional Overpower Protection Doppdpr
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.8.1.9 Technical data Table 698: DUPPDPR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current and voltage: ±2 Hz Power measurement accuracy ±3% of the set value or ±0.002 × S Phase angle: ±2°...
Page 736 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H customer is supplying power into the grid and for protecting the transformer from delivering an excessive load. The function starts and operates when the measured power exceeds the set limit and in a specified direction. The operate time characteristics are according to definite time (DT).
Page 737 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 699: Power calculation Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsA, PhsB, PhsC ⋅ ⋅ Arone ⋅ − ⋅ Pos Seq = ⋅ ⋅ PhsAB ⋅ ⋅ − PhsBC ⋅ ⋅ − PhsCA ⋅ ⋅ − PhsA = ⋅...
Page 738 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Level detector The Level detector compares the magnitude of the measured apparent power to Start value . If the measured value exceeds the set Start value , the Level the set detector sends an enabling signal to the Timer module. Directional calculation The Directional calculation module monitors the direction of the apparent power.
Page 739 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Operating area Start value  Non operating area Figure 384: Operating characteristics with the Start Value setting, Power angle (α) being +45 and Directional mode "Forward" Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the START output. The time characteristics are Operate delay according to DT.
Page 740 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H turbines. It can also be used in feeder protection applications, for example, the ring network. DOPPDPR in the forward direction can be used to protect the generators or motors from delivering or consuming excess power. For example, the generator overpower protection can be used to shed a noncritical feeder load or to start parallel generators.
Page 741 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Operating area Operating Non operating area operating area area (a ) Figure 385: Forward active overpower characteristics (a) and forward reactive overpower characteristics (b) Operating operating area area operating area Operating area Figure 386: Reverse active overpower characteristics (a) and reverse reactive overpower characteristics (b) 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 742 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.8.2.6 Signals Table 700: DOPPDPR Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age A or phase-to- phase voltage AB U_A_BC SIGNAL Phase-to-earth volt- age B or phase-to- phase voltage BC...
Page 743 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Table 703: DOPPDPR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation On/Off 1=on 5=off Measurement 3=Pos Seq Selection of power 1=PhsA, PhsB, PhsC mode calculation method 2=Arone 3=Pos Seq 4=PhsAB 5=PhsBC 6=PhsCA 7=PhsA...
Page 744: Directional Reactive Power Undervoltage Protection Dqptuv
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.8.2.9 Technical data Table 706: DOPPDPR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current and voltage: f = f ±2 Hz Power measurement accuracy ±3% of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 745 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The function contains a blocking functionality to block function outputs, timer or the function itself. 4.8.3.4 Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of DQPTUV can be described using a module diagram.
Page 746 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 389: Operating area of DQPTUV function Quadrant II Generator produces active power, but draws reactive power (under-excited) Quadrant III Generator produces both active and reactive power Pol reversal to “True”. The power direction can be reversed by setting Timer Once activated by both Under voltage detection and Reactive power monitoring module, the Timer activates the START output.
Page 747 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.8.3.5 Application Use of distributed power generating units ( PGU) is rapidly increasing due to liberalized markets (deregulation) and the global trend to use more renewable sources of energy. As the capacity of these generating units increase, they are connected directly to medium voltage networks.
Page 748 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 708: DQPTUV Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate START BOOLEAN Start 4.8.3.7 Settings Table 709: DQPTUV Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Voltage start value 0.20...1.20 0.01 0.85 Start value for un- der voltage detec- tion Operate delay time 100...300000...
Page 749: Arc Protection Arcsarc
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.8.3.9 Technical data Table 713: DQPTUV Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current and voltage: ±2 Hz Reactive power range |PF| <0.71 Power: ±3.0 % or ±0.002 × Q Voltage: ±1.5 % of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 750: Operation Principle
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.9.3 Functionality The arc protection function ARCSARC detects arc situations in air insulated metal- clad switchgears caused by, for example, human errors during maintenance or insulation breakdown during operation. The function detects light from an arc either locally or via a remote light signal. The function also monitors phase and residual currents to be able to make accurate decisions on ongoing arcing situations.
Page 751: Application
1MRS757644 H Protection functions “Light+current” mode, on light information only in “Light only” mode or on remotely controlled information in “BI controlled” mode. When the "BI controlled" mode is in use and the OPR_MODE input is activated, the operation of the function is based on light information only.
Page 752 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Cover unused inputs with dust caps. Arc protection with one protection relay In installations, with limited possibilities to realize signalling between protection relays protecting incoming and outgoing feeders, or if only the protection relay for the incoming feeder is to be exchanged, an arc protection with a lower protective level can be achieved with one protection relay.
Page 753 1MRS757644 H Protection functions trip signal to all protection relays protecting the outgoing feeders, which in turn results in tripping of all circuit breakers of the outgoing feeders. For maximum safety, the protection relays can be configured to trip all the circuit breakers regardless of where the arc is detected.
Page 754 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H HSO2 REF 615 HSO1 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io 3I, Io REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 Binary horisontal GOOSE connection Ethernet switch Figure 394: Arc protection with several protection relays and high-speed outputs and GOOSE Arc protection with several protection relays and a separate arc protection system...
Page 755: Signals
1MRS757644 H Protection functions outgoing feeders, which in turn results in tripping of all circuit breakers of the outgoing feeders. Figure 395: Arc protection with several protection relays and a separate arc protection system 4.9.6 Signals Table 714: ARCSARC Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 756: Settings
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 715: ARCSARC Output signals Name Type Description OPERATE BOOLEAN Operate ARC_FLT_DET BOOLEAN Fault arc detected=light sig- nal output 4.9.7 Settings Table 716: ARCSARC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Phase start value 0.50...40.00 0.01 2.50...
Page 757: Technical Revision History
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Characteristic Value Operation mode = "Light+cur- 9 ms 12 ms 15 ms rent" , 4 ms 6 ms 9 ms Operation mode = "Light only" 9 ms 10 ms 12 ms 4 ms 6 ms 7 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms <55 ms...
Page 758: Operation Principle
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.10.3 Functionality The motor start-up supervision function STTPMSU is designed for protection against excessive starting time and locked rotor conditions of the motor during starting. For a good and reliable operation of the motor, the thermal stress during the motor starting is maintained within the allowed limits.
Page 759 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 397: Functional module diagram Startup supervisor This module detects the starting of the motor. The starting and stalling motor conditions are detected in four different modes of operation. This is done through Operation mode setting. When the Operation mode setting is operated in the "IIt"...
Page 760 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Start detection A and remain below that level below 90 percent of the set value of Str over delay time , that is, until the start-up situation is over. for a time of Figure 398: Functionality of start-up supervision in the "IIt and IIt&stall" mode In case of the "IIt, CB"...
Page 761 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 399: Functionality of start-up supervision in the "IIt, CB" mode and the "IIt and stall, CB" mode Str over delay time setting has different purposes in different modes of operation. • In the “IIt” or “IIt & stall” modes, the aim of this setting is to check for the completion of the motor start-up period.
Page 762 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H combined rotor and stator resistance starting current of the motor starting time of the motor This equation is normally represented as the integral of I²t. It is a commonly used method in protective protection relays to protect the motor from thermal stress during starting.
Page 763: Application
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Cumulative time Lim . The start time counter reduces at the rate of the value of Counter Red rate . The LOCK_START output becomes activated at the start of MOT_START. The output Restart inhibit time . remains active for a period of Figure 400: Time delay for cumulative start This module also protects the motor from consecutive start-ups.
Page 764 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H or mechanical constraint, this starting method is not suitable. The full-voltage starting produces the highest starting torque. A high starting torque is generally required to start a high-inertia load to limit the acceleration time. In this method, full voltage is applied to the motor when the switch is in the "On"...
Page 765 1MRS757644 H Protection functions The failure of a motor to accelerate or to reach its full nominal speed in an acceptable time when the stator is energized is caused by several types of abnormal conditions, including a mechanical failure of the motor or load bearings, low supply voltage, open circuit in one phase of a three-phase voltage supply or too high starting voltage.
Page 766: Signals
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H specified maximum allowed number of motor start-ups start-up time of the motor (in seconds) margin safety margin (~10...20 percent) Counter Red rate Setting of Counter Red rate is calculated by ∑ ∆ reset (Equation 146) specified start time of the motor in seconds duration during which the maximum number of motor start-ups stated by the reset manufacturer can be made;...
Page 767: Settings
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Description MOT_START BOOLEAN Signal to show that motor startup is in progress LOCK_START BOOLEAN Lock out condition for restart of motor. 4.10.7 Settings Table 723: STTPMSU Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Motor start-up A...
Page 768: Monitored Data
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Table 726: STTPMSU Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Motor standstill A 0.05...0.20 0.01 0.12 Current limit to check for motor standstill condition 4.10.8 Monitored data Table 727: STTPMSU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 769: Multipurpose Protection Mapgapc
1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.10.10 Technical revision history Table 729: STTPMSU Technical revision history 66/51LRS Technical revision histo- Technical revision Change Internal improvement Ini start up counter . Added setting 4.11 Multipurpose protection MAPGAPC 4.11.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification...
Page 770 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Timer AI_VALUE OPERATE Level detector ENA_ADD START Blocking BLOCK logic Figure 404: Functional module diagram Level detector Start value setting. The Operation The level detector compares AI_VALUE to the mode setting defines the direction of the level detector. Operation mode types Table 730: Operation Mode...
Page 771: Application
1MRS757644 H Protection functions Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration > System > Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program.
Page 772: Monitored Data
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.11.7 Settings Table 733: MAPGAPC Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Start value –10000.0...10000.0 Start value Start value Add –100.0...100.0 Start value Add Operate delay time 0...200000 Operate delay time Table 734: MAPGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 773 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.12.1 Three-phase overload protection for shunt capacitor banks COLPTOC 4.12.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE identification identification C37.2 device number Three-phase overload protection COLPTOC 3I> 3I< 51C/37 for shunt capacitor banks 4.12.1.2 Function block Figure 405: Function block symbol 4.12.1.3 Functionality...
Page 774 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 406: Functional module diagram Peak integrated current calculator The peak integrated current calculator calculates peak value of integrated current (I_PEAK_INT_A, I_PEAK_INT_B and I_PEAK_INT_C) which is proportional to the voltage over capacitor. The I_PEAK_INT_A, I_PEAK_INT_B and I_PEAK_INT_C values are available in monitored data view.
Page 775 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Timer 1 Once activated, the Timer 1 module activates the ST_OVLOD output. The operation Time multiplier . The operation time time depends on the overload level and under standard characteristics is based on ANSI/IEEE 37.99 and IEC 60871-1 recommendations.
Page 776 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 408: Inverse-time characteristic curves for overload stage Start value overload for If the integrated current exceeds 1.1 times the setting Start value a short period but does not operate as the current decreases within overload , the output ST_OVLOD is kept active but the operation timer is frozen. Start value overload However, if the integrated current exceeds 1.1 times the setting value again, the operation timer continue from the freezing point.
Page 777 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 409: The behavior of the IDMT timer and the output ST_OVLOD The ST_DUR_OVLOD output indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the operation time in the Timer 1 module and is available in the monitored data view.
Page 778 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H CB_CLOSED signal. The CB_CLOSED signal is True when the CB position is closed. Under current detector Enable under current The Under current detector module can be enabled by setting to “Enable” and disabled by setting it to “Disable”. The Under current detector module is also disabled when CB_CLOSED is FALSE, that is, when circuit breaker is open.
Page 779 1MRS757644 H Protection functions program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global Blocking mode . setting Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the “Freeze timers” mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value. In the “Block all” mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
Page 780 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False Input showing the status of capacitor circuit breaker Table 740: COLPTOC Output signals Name Type Description OPR_OVLOD BOOLEAN Overload operated OPR_UN_I BOOLEAN...
Page 781 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Alarm delay time 500...6000000 300000 Alarm delay time Un Cur delay time 100...120000 1000 Delay time for un- der current opera- tion Table 742: COLPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step...
Page 782: Current Unbalance Protection For Capacitor Banks Cubptoc
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.12.1.9 Technical data Table 746: COLPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz, and no harmonics 5 % of the set value or 0.002 × I Start time for overload stage Typically 75 ms Start time for under current stage...
Page 783 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.12.2.3 Functionality The current unbalance protection for shunt capacitor banks function CUBPTOC is used to protect the double-Y-connected capacitor banks from internal faults. CUBPTOC is suitable for the protection of internally fused, externally fused and fuseless applications. CUBPTOC has two stages of operation, that is, operation stage and alarm stage.
Page 784 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 412: Double-Y-connected capacitor bank The phase angle of the measured fundamental frequency component of the unbalance current I_UNB is synchronized by using the phase current I_A as a reference. ∠ = ∠ I UNB − ∠ (Equation 147) In a three-phase star-connected capacitor bank circuit, there may be some amount of natural unbalance current flowing through the neutral, which is primarily due...
Page 785 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Figure 413: Natural unbalance compensation. (a) Healthy condition when the natural unbalance is recorded (b) Unbalance compensation during faulty conditions Natural The natural unbalance current compensation is enabled using the setting Comp Enable . If Natural Comp Enable is set to “FALSE”, the unbalance current is not Natural Comp Enable is set to “TRUE”, the compensated unbalance compensated.
Page 786 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H selected, an immediate reset occurs. The START output is deactivated when the reset timer has elapsed. Time multiplier is used for scaling the IDMT operation and reset times. The setting Minimum operate time defines the minimum desired The setting parameter operation time for IDMT.
Page 787 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Phase angle of the Phase and branch of the Counters to be incremented compensated unbalance element failure current (degrees) +75...+105 Phase-C branch1 COUNT_BR1_C Phase-B branch2 COUNT_BR2_B +45...+75 Phase-B branch2 COUNT_BR2_B +15...+45 Phase-A branch1 COUNT_BR1_A Phase-B branch2 COUNT_BR2_B Fuse location should If the capacitor bank is fuseless, then the setting...
Page 788 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Phase angle of the Phase and branch of the Counters to be incremented compensated unbalance element failure current (degrees) +45...+75 Phase-B branch 1 COUNT_BR1_B +15...+45 Phase-A branch 2 COUNT_BR2_A Phase-B branch 1 COUNT_BR1_B Alarm delay time has elapsed, the corresponding counter value is incremented After based on the magnitude of the unbalance current.
Page 789 1MRS757644 H Protection functions by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the IED program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode . Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the operation timer is frozen to the prevailing value.
Page 790 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 414: Example of double-Y-connected shunt capacitor bank unbalance protection Connect the phase current analog input I_A and unbalance current I_UNB to the IED for the CUBPTOC function to start working. Steps to measure natural unbalance current Natural Comp Enable must be set to “TRUE”.
Page 791 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.12.2.6 Signals Table 751: CUBPTOC Input signals Name Type Default Description I_UNB REAL Capacitor bank unbal- ance current REAL Phase A current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode Table 752: CUBPTOC Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 792 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operate delay time 50...200000 5000 Operate delay time Alarm delay time 50...200000 200000 Alarm delay time Table 754: CUBPTOC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Fuse location 1=Internal Location of capaci-...
Page 793 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_NAT_ANGL FLOAT32 -179.00...179.00 Recorded natu- ral unbalance current angle I_COM_AMPL FLOAT32 0.00...5.00 Compensated unbalance cur- rent amplitude I_COM_ANGL FLOAT32 -179.00...179.00 Compensated unbalance cur- rent angle COUNT_BR1_A INT32 0...2147483647 Number of ele- ment failures in branch1 phase-A COUNT_BR2_A...
Page 794: Shunt Capacitor Bank Switching Resonance Protection, Current Based Srcptoc794
Protection functions 1MRS757644 H 4.12.2.9 Technical data Table 758: CUBPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz 1.5 % of the set value or 0.002 × I Start time Typically 26 ms Reset time Typically 40 ms Reset ratio...
Page 795 1MRS757644 H Protection functions 4.12.3.3 Functionality The shunt capacitor bank switching resonance protection, current based, function SRCPTOC is used for detecting three-phase resonance caused by capacitor switching or topology changes in the network. The operating characteristic is a definite time (DT). SRCPTOC contains a blocking functionality.
Page 796 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H the High pass filter. The K harmonic component is removed by passing the High pass filter output through the K harmonic Band stop filter. The magnitude response of the High pass filter and all the harmonic Band stop filters are shown in Figure 417 Figure 417: Magnitude response of High pass and all the harmonic Band stop filters Similarly resonance current is calculated in the same way for phase B and phase...
Page 797 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Timer 1 Once activated, the timer activates the alarm timer. The timer characteristic is Alarm delay according to DT. When the alarm timer has reached the value set by time , the ALARM output is activated. If the fault disappears before the alarm activates, the alarm timer is reset immediately.
Page 798 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H with other system components. However, this method is not economical but more time-consuming. The capacitor switching-resonance protection function can be used as a solution to the above mentioned problem. The basis for the harmonic resonance protection is the detection of a current harmonic resonance condition caused by capacitor switching.
Page 799 1MRS757644 H Protection functions Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking mode RESO_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Input signal from higher frequency res- onance branch Table 761: SRCPTOC Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm OPERATE BOOLEAN...
Page 800 Protection functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_RESO_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Resonance current for phase C SRCPTOC Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 4.12.3.9 Technical data Table 765: SRCPTOC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz Operate value accuracy: ±3 % of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 801: Protection Related Functions
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Protection related functions Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 5.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE identification identification C37.2 device number Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 3I2f> 5.1.2 Function block Figure 418: Function block 5.1.3 Functionality The three-phase inrush detector function INRPHAR is used to coordinate transformer inrush situations in distribution networks.
Page 802: Application
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 419: Functional module diagram I_2H/I_1H This module calculates the ratio of the second harmonic (I_2H) and fundamental Start frequency (I_1H) phase currents. The calculated value is compared to the set value . If the calculated value exceeds the set Start value , the module output is activated.
Page 803: Signals
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions 5.1.5 Application Transformer protections require high stability to avoid tripping during magnetizing inrush conditions. A typical example of an inrush detector application is doubling the start value of an overcurrent protection during inrush detection. The inrush detection function can be used to selectively block overcurrent and earth-fault function stages when the ratio of second harmonic component over the fundamental component exceeds the set value.
Page 804: Settings
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H 5.1.6 Signals Table 767: INRPHAR Input signals Name Type Default Description I_2H_A SIGNAL Second harmonic phase A current I_1H_A SIGNAL Fundamental fre- quency phase A cur- rent I_2H_B SIGNAL Second harmonic phase B current I_1H_B SIGNAL Fundamental fre- quency phase B cur-...
Page 805: Monitored Data
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions 5.1.8 Monitored data Table 772: INRPHAR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description INRPHAR Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 5.1.9 Technical data Table 773: INRPHAR Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f = f Current measurement: ±1.5 % of the set value or ±0.002 ×...
Page 806: Function Block
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H 5.2.2 Function block Figure 421: Function block 5.2.3 Functionality The circuit breaker failure protection function CCBRBRF is activated by trip commands from the protection functions. The commands are either internal commands to the terminal or external commands through binary inputs. The start command is always a default for three-phase operation.
Page 807 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Level detector Timer 1 POSCLOSE Start Retrip TRRET logic logic START Timer 2 Back-up Level detector trip TRBU logic Timer 3 CB_FAULT CB_FAULT_AL BLOCK Figure 422: Functional module diagram Level detector 1 Current value . If The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Current value , the level detector reports the the measured value exceeds the set...
Page 808 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 3", the resetting logic requires that Current value setting. the values of all the phase currents drop below the CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 4", the resetting logic requires that the values of the phase currents and the residual current drops below the Current value and Current value Res setting respectively.
Page 809 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions value of this setting is made as low as possible at the same time as any unwanted operation is avoided. A typical setting is 90 - 150 ms, which is also dependent on the retrip timer. The minimum time delay for the CB failure delay can be estimated as: CBfailuredelay Retriptime t...
Page 810 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H CB fail retrip mode setting is set to "Off". • The retrip logic is inactive if the CB fail retrip mode is set to the "Current check" mode, the activation of the • If CB failure mode setting. retrip output TRRET depends on the CB failure mode is set to the "Current"...
Page 811 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Trip pulse time setting or activated, it remains active for the time set with the Current value setting, until the values of all the phase currents drop below the whichever takes longer. CB failure trip mode is set to "1 out of 4", the failure detection is based Current value on either a phase current or a residual current exceeding the Current value Res setting respectively.
Page 812: Application
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 426: Backup trip logic 5.2.5 Application The n-1 criterion is often used in the design of a fault clearance system. This means that the fault is cleared even if some component in the fault clearance system is faulty.
Page 813: Signals
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions CCBRBRF can be blocked by using an internally assigned signal or an external signal from a binary input. This signal blocks the function of the breaker failure protection even when the timers have started or the timers are reset. The retrip timer is initiated after the start input is set to true.
Page 814: Settings
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block CBFP operation START BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP start command POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False CB in closed position CB_FAULT BOOLEAN 0=False CB faulty and unable to trip Table 776: CCBRBRF Output signals Name Type...
Page 815: Monitored Data
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Trip pulse time 0...60000 Pulse length of ret- rip and backup trip outputs Start latching 1=Rising edge Start reset delayed 1=Rising edge mode or immediately 2=Level sensitive 5.2.8 Monitored data Table 779: CCBRBRF Monitored data Name...
Page 816: Master Trip Trpptrc
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Master trip TRPPTRC 5.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Master trip TRPPTRC Master Trip 94/86 5.3.2 Function block Figure 428: Function block 5.3.3 Functionality The master trip function TRPPTRC is used as a trip command collector and handler after the protection functions.
Page 817: Application
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Timer The duration of the TRIP output signal from TRPPTRC can be adjusted with the Trip pulse time setting when the "Non-latched" operation mode is used. The pulse length should be long enough to secure the opening of the breaker. For three-pole tripping, TRPPTRC has a single input OPERATE, through which all trip output signals are routed from the protection functions within the protection relay, or from external protection functions via one or more of the protection relay's binary inputs.
Page 818: Signals
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H The inputs from the protection functions are connected to the OPERATE input. Usually, a logic block OR is required to combine the different function outputs to this input. The TRIP output is connected to the binary outputs on the IO board. This signal can also be used for other purposes within the protection relay, for example when starting the breaker failure protection.
Page 819: Settings
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions 5.3.7 Settings Table 785: TRPPTRC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Trip pulse time 20...60000 Minimum duration of trip output sig- Trip output mode 1=Non-latched Select the opera- 1=Non-latched...
Page 820: Function Block
However, they are a substantial threat to humans and properties; people can touch or get close to conductors carrying large amounts of energy. ABB has developed a patented technology (US Patent 7,069,116 B2 June 27, 2006, US Patent 7,085,659 B2 August 1, 2006) to detect a high-impedance fault.
Page 821 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions the PHIZ algorithm causing unnecessary detections. Normally, electrical network operator does not know the existence of these events well and those can also be happening very randomly. The effect is also always dependent on event location compared to protection relay measurement location.
Page 822: Application
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H PHIZ is based on algorithms that use earth current signatures which are considered non-stationary, temporally volatile and of various burst duration. All harmonic and non-harmonic components within the available data window can play a vital role in the high-impedance fault detection.
Page 823: Signals
Reliable detection of PHIZ provides safety to humans and animals. PHIZ detection can also prevent fire and minimize property damage. ABB has developed innovative technology for high-impedance fault detection with over ten years of research resulting in many successful field tests.
Page 824 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Table 790: PHIZ Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Security Level 1...10 Security Level Table 791: PHIZ Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off System type...
Page 825: Monitored Data
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions 5.4.8 Monitored data Table 792: PHIZ Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Position Dbpos Position 0=intermediate 1=open 2=closed 3=faulty PHIZ Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off 5.4.9 Technical revision history Table 793: PHIZ Technical revision history Technical revision Change Internal improvement...
Page 826: Functionality
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H 5.5.3 Functionality An emergency condition can arise in cases where the motor needs to be started despite knowing that this can increase the temperature above limits or cause a thermal overload that can damage the motor. The emergency start-up function ESMGAPC allows motor start-ups during such emergency conditions.
Page 827: Signals
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions restarted. Furthermore, if the calculated thermal level is higher than the restart inhibit level at an emergency start condition, the calculated thermal level is set slightly below the restart inhibit level. Also, if the register value of the cumulative start-up time counter exceeds the restart inhibit level, the value is set slightly below the restart disable value to allow at least one motor start-up.
Page 828: Settings
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H 5.5.7 Settings Table 796: ESMGAPC Group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Motor standstill A 0.05...0.20 0.01 0.12 Current limit to check for motor standstill condition Table 797: ESMGAPC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 829: Identification
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Automatic switch-onto-fault logic CVPSOF 5.6.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Automatic switch-onto-fault logic CVPSOF CVPSOF SOFT/21/50 (SOF) 5.6.2 Function block Figure 440: Function block 5.6.3 Functionality The automatic switch-onto-fault function CVPSOF is a complementary function, especially to the distance protection function (DSTPDIS), but it can also be used to complement the non-directional or directional overcurrent protection functions (PHxPTOC, DPHxPDOC).
Page 830 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 441: Functional module diagram Trigger This module is used for detecting a possible fault immediately after circuit breaker closing. The use of external protection function, typically the start signal from a non-directional distance zone or overcurrent stage, is required for fault indication. The START and START_DLYD inputs are available for the purpose.
Page 831 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Table 801: Options for dead line detection Automatic SOTF Ini Description DLD disabled The dead line detection function is disabled. This operation mode must be applied when voltage transformers are loca- ted on the bus side of the circuit breaker. Voltage The dead line detection function is enabled and based solely on the undervoltage condition.
Page 832: Application
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H is inactivated or the dead line condition disappears. Thus, the module becomes SOTF reset time is exceeded. inactive after the set Operation mode setting defines the When the SOTF control module is active, the operation criteria for the detection of a switch-onto-fault condition. The detection can be based on the external start signals from the distance or overcurrent functions, on the measured internal voltage and current levels, or on both.
Page 833: Signals
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions instead. If a non-directional overcurrent is used for starting, the current setting must not be higher than what is required for the non-delayed and dependable tripping for a close-in threephase fault during minimum source conditions. If the short-circuit current along the feeder is considerably higher than the maximum load currents, it is possible that the whole feeder length is covered by CVPSOF tripping.
Page 834: Settings
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H 5.6.7 Settings Table 805: CVPSOF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Operation Off / On 1=on 1=on 5=off Table 806: CVPSOF Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description...
Page 835: Technical Data
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions 5.6.9 Technical data Table 808: CVPSOF Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2Hz Current: ±1.5 % of the set value or ±0.002 × I Voltage: ±1.5 % of the set value or ±0.002 × U Operate time accuracy ±1.0 % of the set value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics...
Page 836: Operation Principle
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H The fault distance calculation is based on locally measured fundamental frequency current and voltage phasors. The full operation of SCEFRFLO requires that all phase currents and phase-to-earth voltages are measured. The fault distance estimate is obtained when the function is externally or internally triggered.
Page 837 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Nominal phase-to-phase voltage Maximum three-phase load Z Max phase load = 320.0 Ω. For example, if U = 20 kV and S = 1 MVA, then The identification of the faulty phases is compulsory for the correct operation of SCEFRFLO.
Page 838 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Impedance valule Description Flt loop resistance The total fault loop resistance from the substation to the fault lo- cation in primary ohms. Fault point resistance is included in this value. The composition of this term is different for short-circuit and earth-fault loops as described in the following subsections.
Page 839 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions The recorded data Flt phase reactance provides the estimated positive-sequence reactance from the substation to the fault location. Figure 444: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-earth fault loops “AG Fault”, “BG Fault” or “CG Fault” EF algorithm The earth-fault distance calculation algorithm is selected with setting Sel .
Page 840 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 445: Description of the equivalent load distance Equivalent load Dis can be calculated based on the load flow and The exact value for voltage drop calculations using data from DMS-system and the following equation. d real Equivalent load Dis d tap d...
Page 841 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions of the main line. As a result, the calculated value is stored in the recorded data Equivalent load Dis. EF algorithm Sel is equal to “Load modelling”, the In addition, when the setting EF algorithm Cur Sel setting determines whether zero-sequence “Io based” or negative-sequence “I2 based”...
Page 842 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Flt loop reactance Flt phase reactance (Equation 161) Figure 446: Fault loop impedance for phase-to-phase fault loops (either “AB Fault”, “BC Fault” or “CA Fault”) The fault distance calculation algorithm for the phase-to-phase fault loops is Load Com PP loops and Enable simple model .
Page 843 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Figure 447: Fault loop impedance for a three-phase fault loop (“ABC Fault”) The three-phase fault distance is calculated with a special measuring element using positive-sequence quantities. This is advantageous especially in case of non- transposed (asymmetric) lines, as the influence of line parameter asymmetry is reduced.
Page 844 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 448: Definition of a physical fault point resistance in different fault loops Steady-state asymmetry and load compensation In reality, power systems are never perfectly symmetrical. The asymmetry produces steady-state quantities in the form of zero-sequence and negative-sequence voltages and currents.
Page 845 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions negatively to fault distance estimation are detected, the Flt Dist quality is according Table 811 . In this case estimated fault distance, Flt distance value is given in HMI in parenthesis. Table 811: Fault distance quality indicator Flt Dist quality Value Corresponding inaccuracy description Estimation stability criterion has not been...
Page 846 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H faults. As data sheet impedance per unit values are generally valid only for a certain tower configuration, the values should be adjusted according to the actual installation configuration. This minimizes the fault location errors caused by inaccurate settings.
Page 847 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Table 813: Positive-sequence impedance values for typical 10/20 kV conductors, “Flat” tower configuration assumed Name R1 [Ω/km] X1 [Ω/km] Al/Fe 36/6 Sparrow 0.915 0.383 Al/Fe 54/9 Raven 0.578 0.368 Al/Fe 85/14 Pigeon 0.364 0.354 Al/Fe 93/39 Imatra 0.335 0.344 Al/Fe 108/23 Vaasa...
Page 848 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H conductor AC resistance [Ω/km] ρ earth the equivalent depth [m] of the earth return path ρ earth resistivity [Ωm] earth ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ the equivalent radius [m] for conductor bundle radius [m] for single conductor distance [m] between phases x and y Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React settings Ph leakage Ris and Ph capacitive React settings are used for improving fault...
Page 849 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions In case of unearthed network, if the earth-fault current produced by the protected feeder I is known, the setting value can be calculated. ⋅ 3 Ph capacitive React (Equation 171) Phase-to-earth voltage Ph capacitive React setting by SCEFRFLO can also determine the value for the Ph capacitive React is triggered by the binary measurements.
Page 850 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Line Len section B or Line Len section C in the order section A-> section B-> section Line Len section A Impedance model with one line section is enabled by setting R1 line section A , X1 line to differ from zero.
Page 851 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Figure 452 the feeder is modelled either with one or three line sections with Table 815 parameters given in Table 815: Impedance settings Parameter Impedance model with one Impedance model with three section sections R1 line section A 0.660 Ω/pu 0.236 Ω/pu X1 line section A...
Page 852 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H 5.7.4.3 Trigger detection The fault distance estimate is obtained when SCEFRFLO is triggered. The triggering Calculation Trg mode . The options for selection method is defined with setting are: “External” or “Internal”, where the default value is “External”. The TRIGG_OUT event indicates fault distance value recording moment.
Page 853 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Figure 454: The behavior of fault distance estimate in time 5.7.4.4 Alarm indication SCEFRFLO contains an alarm output for the calculated fault distance. If the Low alarm Dis limit calculated fault distance FLT_DISTANCE is between the settings High alarm Dis limit , the ALARM output is activated.
Page 854: Application
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H 5.7.4.5 Recorded data All the information required for a later fault analysis is recorded to SCEFRFLO recorded data. In the protection relay, recorded data is found in Monitoring > Recorded data > Other protection > SCEFRFLO. The function has also monitored data values which are used for the read-out of continuous calculation values.
Page 855: Signals
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions SCEFRFLO can also be applied for earth-fault location in unearthed distribution networks. Configuration example A typical configuration example for SCEFRFLO triggering is illustrated in Figure Calculation Trg mode is set to where external triggering is applied, that is, “External”.
Page 856: Settings
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description U_C_CA SIGNAL Phase to earth volt- age C or phase to phase voltage CA SIGNAL Residual voltage SIGNAL Positive phase se- quence voltage SIGNAL Negative phase se- quence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for acti- vating the blocking...
Page 857 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Table 819: SCEFRFLO Group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Z Max phase load 1.0...10000.0 80.0 Impedance per phase of max. load, overcurr./un- der-imp., PSL Ph leakage Ris 20...1000000 210000 Line PhE leakage resistance in pri- mary ohms Ph capacitive React 10...1000000...
Page 858: Monitored Data
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description X0 line section C 0.000...1000.000 ohm / pu 0.001 4.000 Zero sequence line reactance, line sec- tion C Line Len section C 0.000...1000.000 0.001 0.000 Line length, section Table 821: SCEFRFLO Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range)
Page 859 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions 5.7.8 Monitored data Table 823: SCEFRFLO Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description FLOAT32 0.0...1000000.0 Fault point re- sistance in pri- mary ohms FAULT_LOOP Enum Fault impedance 1=AG Fault loop 2=BG Fault 3=CG Fault 4=AB Fault 5=BC Fault 6=CA Fault...
Page 860 Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description SCEFRFLO Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off Triggering time Timestamp Estimate trigger- ing time Flt loop Enum Fault loop 1=AG Fault 2=BG Fault 3=CG Fault 4=AB Fault 5=BC Fault 6=CA Fault 7=ABC Fault -5=No fault...
Page 861 1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description A Pre Flt Phs B FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Pre-fault current Magn phase B, magni- tude A Pre Flt Phs B FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Pre-fault current Angl phase B, angle A Pre Flt Phs C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Pre-fault current...
Page 862: Technical Data
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description V Flt Phs B Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Fault voltage phase B, magni- tude V Flt Phs B angle FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Fault voltage phase B, angle V Flt Phs C Magn FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Fault voltage phase C, magni-...
Page 863: Function Block
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions 5.8.2 Function block Figure 456: Function block 5.8.3 Functionality The circuit breaker uncorresponding position start-up function UPCALH detects circuit breaker openings in an unknown situation. An unexpected breaker opening can be caused by, for example, internal mechanical malfunction. UPCALH can be used independently.
Page 864: Application
Protection related functions 1MRS757644 H Protection activation check The main purpose of the module is to disable the Operate logic module when the CB open command has been deployed by another function, for example, a protection or control function. The activation of the CB_OPEN_CMD input disables the Operate logic module immediately.
Page 865: Technical Data
1MRS757644 H Protection related functions Table 828: UPCALH Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Operate pulse time 100...20000 Operate pulse time Signal pwr on delay 300...500 Signal power on de- lay time Table 829: UPCALH Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter...
Page 866: Supervision Functions
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 6.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 6.1.2 Function block Figure 458: Function block 6.1.3 Functionality The trip circuit supervision function TCSSCBR is designed to supervise the control circuit of the circuit breaker.
Page 867: Application
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Figure 459: Functional module diagram TCS status This module receives the trip circuit status from the hardware. A detected failure in the trip circuit activates the timer. Timer Once activated, the timer runs until the set value of Operate delay time has elapsed.
Page 868 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 460: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision with an external resistor. The TCSSCBR blocking switch is not required since the external resistor is used. If TCS is required only in a closed position, the external shunt resistance can be omitted.
Page 869 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Figure 461: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision without an external resistor. The circuit breaker open indication is set to block TCSSCBR when the circuit breaker is open. Trip circuit supervision and other trip contacts It is typical that the trip circuit contains more than one trip contact in parallel, for example in transformer feeders where the trip of a Buchholz relay is connected in parallel with the feeder terminal and other relays involved.
Page 870 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 462: Constant test current flow in parallel trip contacts and trip circuit supervision In case of parallel trip contacts, the recommended way to do the wiring is that the TCS test current flows through all wires and joints. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 871 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Figure 463: Improved connection for parallel trip contacts where the test current flows through all wires and joints Several trip circuit supervision functions parallel in circuit Not only the trip circuit often have parallel trip contacts, it is also possible that the circuit has multiple TCS circuits in parallel.
Page 872 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H An auxiliary relay can be used between the protection relay trip contact and the circuit breaker coil. This way the breaking capacity question is solved, but the TCS circuit in the protection relay monitors the healthy auxiliary relay coil, not the circuit breaker coil.
Page 873 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Using power output contacts without trip circuit supervision If TCS is not used but the contact information of corresponding power outputs are required, the internal resistor can be by-passed. The output can then be utilized as a normal power output.
Page 874 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 465: Incorrect connection of trip-circuit supervision A connection of three protection relays with a double pole trip circuit is shown in the following figure. Only the protection relay R3 has an internal TCS circuit. In order to test the operation of the protection relay R2, but not to trip the circuit breaker, the upper trip contact of the protection relay R2 is disconnected, as shown in the figure, while the lower contact is still connected.
Page 875: Signals
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Figure 466: Incorrect testing of protection relays 6.1.6 Signals Table 832: TCSSCBR Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status Table 833: TCSSCBR Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm output 6.1.7 Settings 620 series...
Page 876: Monitored Data
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Table 834: TCSSCBR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Operate delay time 20...300000 3000 Operate delay time Table 835: TCSSCBR Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 877: Functionality
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions 6.2.2 Function block Figure 467: Function block 6.2.3 Functionality The current circuit supervision function CCSPVC is used for monitoring current transformer secondary circuits. CCSPVC calculates internally the sum of phase currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and compares the sum against the measured single reference current (I_REF).
Page 878 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H MAX I A I B I C ( _ , _ , _ ) × Start value (Equation 173) The differential current is limited to 1.0 × In. Figure 469: CCSPVC operating characteristics When the differential current I_DIFF is in the operating region, the FAIL output is activated.
Page 879: Application
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Timer The timer is activated with the FAIL signal. The ALARM output is activated after a fixed 200 ms delay. FAIL needs to be active during the delay. When the internal blocking is activated, the FAIL output is deactivated immediately immediately.
Page 880 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 470: Connection diagram for reference current measurement with core- balanced current transformer Current measurement with two independent three-phase sets of CT cores Figure 471 Figure 472 show diagrams of connections where the reference current is measured with two independent three-phase sets of CT cores. 620 series Technical Manual...
Page 881 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Figure 471: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three-phase current transformer protection cores When using the measurement core for reference current measurement, it should be noted that the saturation level of the measurement core is much lower than with the protection core.
Page 882 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 472: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three-phase current transformer cores (protection and measurement) Example of incorrect connection The currents must be measured with two independent cores, that is, the phase currents must be measured with a different core than the reference current.
Page 883: Signals
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Figure 473: Example of incorrect reference current connection 6.2.6 Signals Table 838: CCSPVC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current I_REF SIGNAL Reference current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all bi-...
Page 884: Settings
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H 6.2.7 Settings Table 840: CCSPVC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation On / Off 1=on 5=off Start value 0.05...0.20 0.01 0.05 Minimum operate current differential level Table 841: CCSPVC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 885: Advanced Current Circuit Supervision For Transformers Ctsrctf
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Advanced current circuit supervision for transformers CTSRCTF 6.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Advanced current circuit supervision CTSRCTF MCS 3I, I2 MCS 3I, I2 for transformers 6.3.2 Function block Figure 474: Function block 6.3.3 Functionality...
Page 886 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H The operation of CTSRCTF can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Figure 475: Functional module diagram No-load detection No-load detection module detects the loading condition. If all the three-phase currents of any two sets of current transformer are zero, the protected equipment is considered to be in the no-load condition and the function is internally blocked by activating the INT_BLKD output.
Page 887: Application
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions been detected. The change in the magnitude of I (ΔI2) on the other sets of the current transformer (other than where zero current is detected) is calculated. If the change is detected on the healthy sets of CT, it is an indication of system failure.
Page 888: Signals
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H The methods may not be applicable where additional current channels or voltage channels are not available. This CT secondary circuit supervision presents an algorithm that can be used as an example for detecting the CT secondary failure used for the unit protection of a two-winding or three-winding transformer.
Page 889: Settings
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions 6.3.6 Signals Table 845: CTSRCTF Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A1 SIGNAL Phase A current from set 1 I_B1 SIGNAL Phase B current from set 1 I_C1 SIGNAL Phase C current from set 1 I2_1 SIGNAL Negative-sequence current from set 1...
Page 890: Monitored Data
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Table 847: CTSRCTF Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation Operation Off / On 1=on 1=on 5=off Min operate cur- 0.01...0.50 0.01 0.02 Minimum operate rent current Max operate cur- 1.00...5.00 0.01 1.30 Maximum operate...
Page 891: Current Transformer Supervision For High-Impedance Protection Scheme Hzccxspvc
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Current transformer supervision for high- impedance protection scheme HZCCxSPVC 6.4.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE identification identification C37.2 device number Current transformer supervision HZCCASPVC MCS I_A MCS I_A for high-impedance protection scheme for phase A Current transformer supervision HZCCBSPVC MCS I_B...
Page 892 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H 6.4.4 Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of HZCCxSPVC can be generated with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. The module diagram illustrates all the phases of the function.
Page 893: Measuring Modes
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions secondary circuit. In the "Non-latched" mode, the ALARM output functions normally, that is, it resets as soon as the fault is cleared. 6.4.5 Measuring modes The function operates on two alternative measurement modes, DFT and Peak-to- Measurement mode setting.
Page 894 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 478: Broken secondary detection by HZCCxSPVC In the example, the incoming feeder is carrying a load of 2.0 pu and both outgoing feeders carry an equal load of 1.0 pu However, both HIxPDIF and HZCCxSPVC consider the current as an increased differential or unbalance current because of the broken CT wire in phase C.
Page 895: Signals
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions start setting for HIxPDIF in the example is set as 0.8 pu HIxPDIF operates before HZCCxSPVC. 6.4.7 Signals Table 850: HZCCASPVC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating blocking mode Table 851: HZCCBSPVC Input signals Name...
Page 896 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Table 856: HZCCASPVC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Start value 1.0...100.0 10.0 Start value, per- centage of the nominal current Alarm delay time 100...300000 3000 Alarm delay time...
Page 897: Monitored Data
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Table 861: HZCCCSPVC Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Measurement 2=DFT Selects used meas- 2=DFT mode urement mode 3=Peak-to-Peak 6.4.9 Monitored data Table 862: HZCCASPVC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range)
Page 898: Technical Revision History
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H 6.4.11 Technical revision history Table 866: HZCCxSPVC Technical revision history Technical revision Change Function name changed from HZCCRDIF to HZCCASPVC, HZCCBSPVC, HZCCCSPVC. Fuse failure supervision SEQSPVC 6.5.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE identification identification C37.2 device number...
Page 899 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions 6.5.4 Operation principle Operation setting. The The function can be enabled and disabled with the corresponding parameter values are "On" and "Off". The operation of SEQSPVC can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Figure 480: Functional module diagram Negative phase-sequence criterion A fuse failure based on the negative-sequence criterion is detected if the measured...
Page 900 Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H The calculated delta quantities are compared to the respective set values of the Current change rate and Voltage change rate settings. The delta current and delta voltage algorithms detect a fuse failure if there is a sufficient negative change in the voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in the current amplitude in each phase separately.
Page 901 1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Table 867: Fuse failure output control Fuse failure detection criterion Conditions and function response Negative-sequence criterion If a fuse failure is detected based on the neg- ative sequence criterion, the out- FUSEF_U put is activated. If the fuse failure detection is active for more than five seconds and at the same time all the phase voltage values are below the set Seal in voltage setting with Ena-...
Page 902: Application
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates both FUSEF_U and FUSEF_3PH outputs. 6.5.5 Application Some protection functions operate on the basis of the measured voltage value in the protection relay point. These functions can fail if there is a fault in the measuring circuits between the voltage transformer (or combi sensor or voltage sensor) and protection relay.
Page 903: Settings
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions 6.5.6 Signals Table 868: SEQSPVC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Negative sequence current U_A_AB SIGNAL Phase A voltage U_B_BC SIGNAL Phase B voltage U_C_CA SIGNAL Phase C voltage...
Page 904: Monitored Data
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Current change 0.01...0.50 0.01 0.15 Operate level of rate change in phase current Voltage change 0.25...0.90 0.01 0.40 Operate level of rate change in phase voltage Change rate enable 0=False 0=False Enabling operation of change based...
Page 905: Runtime Counter For Machines And Devices Mdsopt
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions Runtime counter for machines and devices MDSOPT 6.6.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Runtime counter for machines and MDSOPT OPTS OPTM devices 6.6.2 Function block Figure 482: Function block 6.6.3 Functionality The runtime counter for machines and devices function MDSOPT calculates and...
Page 906: Application
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H Operation time counter This module counts the operation time. When POS_ACTIVE is active, the count is continuously added to the time duration until it is deactivated. At any time the OPR_TIME output is the total duration for which POS_ACTIVE is active. The unit of time duration count for OPR_TIME is hour.
Page 907: Settings
1MRS757644 H Supervision functions 6.6.6 Signals Table 874: MDSOPT Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status POS_ACTIVE BOOLEAN 0=False When active indicates the equip- ment is running RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Resets the accumulated operation time to initial value Table 875: MDSOPT Output signals Name Type...
Page 908: Monitored Data
Supervision functions 1MRS757644 H 6.6.8 Monitored data Table 878: MDSOPT Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description MDSOPT Enum Status 1=on 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=off OPR_TIME INT32 0...299999 Total operation time in hours 6.6.9 Technical data Table 879: MDSOPT Technical data Description Value Motor runtime measurement accuracy...
Page 909: Condition Monitoring Functions
1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions Condition monitoring functions Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 7.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE identification identification C37.2 device number Circuit-breaker condition moni- SSCBR CBCM CBCM toring 7.1.2 Function block Figure 484: Function block 7.1.3 Functionality The circuit-breaker condition monitoring function SSCBR is used to monitor...
Page 910 Condition monitoring functions 1MRS757644 H 7.1.4 Operation principle The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes different metering and monitoring sub-functions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “On” and “Off”. The Operation is set to “Off”.
Page 911 1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions Figure 486: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status Phase current check Acc stop current . This module compares the three phase currents to the setting If the current in a phase exceeds the set level, information about the phase is reported to the contact position indicator module.
Page 912 Condition monitoring functions 1MRS757644 H Alarm limit check Inactive Alm days When the inactive days exceed the limit value defined with the setting, the MON_ALM alarm is initiated. The time in hours at which this alarm is Inactive Alm hours parameter as coordinates of UTC. activated can be set with the The alarm signal MON_ALM can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK.
Page 913 1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions between the time when the POSOPEN auxiliary contact opens and the main contact is completely open. To incorporate the time t , a correction factor needs to be added with t to get the actual opening time. This factor is added with the open Opening time Cor (= t ) setting.
Page 914 Condition monitoring functions 1MRS757644 H 7.1.4.4 Operation counter The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation cycles. The opening and closing operations are both included in one operation cycle. The operation counter value is updated after each opening operation. The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram.
Page 915 1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions Figure 492: Functional module diagram for calculating accumulative energy and alarm Accumulated energy calculator This module calculates the accumulated energy I t [(kA) s]. The factor y is set with Current exponent setting. The calculation is initiated with the POSCLOSE input opening events. It ends when Acc stop current setting value.
Page 916 Condition monitoring functions 1MRS757644 H The IPOW_ALM and IPOW_LO outputs can be blocked by activating the binary input BLOCK. 7.1.4.6 Remaining life of circuit breaker Every time the breaker operates, the life of the circuit breaker reduces due to wearing. The wearing in the breaker depends on the tripping current, and the remaining life of the breaker is estimated from the circuit breaker trip curve provided by the manufacturer.
Page 917 1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions 7.1.4.7 Circuit breaker spring-charged indication The circuit breaker spring-charged indication subfunction calculates the spring charging time. The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Figure 495: Functional module diagram for circuit breaker spring-charged indication and alarm Spring charge time measurement...
Page 918: Application
Condition monitoring functions 1MRS757644 H Timer 1 When the PRES_ALM_IN binary input is activated, the PRES_ALM alarm is activated Pressure alarm time setting. The PRES_ALM alarm can after a time delay set with the be blocked by activating the BLOCK input. Timer 2 If the pressure drops further to a very low level, the PRES_LO_IN binary input becomes high, activating the lockout alarm PRES_LO after a time delay set with...
Page 919 1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions Accumulation of I y t Accumulation of I t calculates the accumulated energy ΣI t, where the factor y is known as the current exponent. The factor y depends on the type of the circuit breaker.
Page 920: Signals
Condition monitoring functions 1MRS757644 H Rated operating current = 630 A Rated fault current = 16 kA Op number rated = 30000 Op number fault = 20 Calculation for estimating the remaining life Figure 497 shows that there are 30,000 possible operations at the rated operating current of 630 A and 20 operations at the rated fault current 16 kA.
Page 921 1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions Name Type Default Description OPEN_CB_EXE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open com- mand to coil CLOSE_CB_EXE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for close com- mand to coil PRES_ALM_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure alarm input PRES_LO_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure input for lockout indication SPR_CHR_ST BOOLEAN...
Page 922: Settings
Condition monitoring functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Description PRES_ALM BOOLEAN Pressure below alarm level PRES_LO BOOLEAN Pressure below lockout level OPENPOS BOOLEAN CB is in open position INVALIDPOS BOOLEAN CB is in invalid position (not positively open or closed) CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN CB is in closed position 7.1.7...
Page 923: Monitored Data
1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Op number fault 1...10000 1000 Number of opera- tions possible at rated fault current Inactive Alm days 0...9999 2000 Alarm limit value of the inactive days counter Travel time Clc 2=From Pos to Pos Travel time calcu- 1=From Cmd to Pos...
Page 924: Technical Data
Condition monitoring functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description CB_LIFE_C INT32 -99999...99999 CB Remaining life phase C IPOW_A FLOAT32 0.000...30000.000 Accumulated currents power (Iyt), phase A IPOW_B FLOAT32 0.000...30000.000 Accumulated currents power (Iyt), phase B IPOW_C FLOAT32 0.000...30000.000 Accumulated currents power (Iyt), phase C SSCBR...
Page 925 1MRS757644 H Condition monitoring functions Technical revision Change Maximum value of initial circuit breaker re- Initial CB Rmn life ) maining life time setting ( changed from 9999 to 99999. Added support for measuring circuit breaker travelling time from opening/closing command and auxili- ary contact state signal change.
Page 926: Measurement Functions
Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Basic measurements 8.1.1 Functions The three-phase current measurement function CMMXU is used for monitoring and metering the phase currents of the power system. The three-phase voltage measurement function VMMXU is used for monitoring and metering the phase-to-phase voltages of the power system.
Page 927 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Some of the measurement functions operate on two alternative measurement modes: "DFT" and "RMS". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting. Depending on the measuring function if the measurement mode cannot be selected, the measuring mode is "DFT". Demand value calculation The demand values are calculated separately for each measurement function and per phase when applicable.
Page 928 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H data that do not have zero-point clamping, deadband supervision or limit value supervision. Zero-point clamping A measured value under the zero-point clamping limit is forced to zero. This allows the noise in the input signal to be ignored. The active clamping function forces both the actual measurement value and the angle value of the measured signal to zero.
Page 929 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Figure 498: Presentation of operating limits The range information can also be decoded into boolean output signals on some of the measuring functions and the number of phases required to exceed or undershoot the limit before activating the outputs and can be set with the of phases setting in the three-phase measurement functions CMMXU and VMMXU.
Page 930 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Function Settings for limit value supervision Low limit V Hi high limit res High-high limit Low-low limit Ps Seq A high limit , Ng Phase sequence current measure- High limit Seq A high limit , Zro A ment (CSMSQI) high limit Ps Seq A low limit , Ng Seq...
Page 931 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Figure 499: Integral deadband supervision The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the deadband setting. The value represents the percentage of the difference between the maximum and minimum limit in the units of 0.001 percent x seconds. The reporting delay of the integral algorithms in seconds is calculated with the formula: (max min)
Page 932 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Function Settings Maximum/minimum (=range) F deadband 75/35 (=40 Hz) Frequency measurement (FMMXU) Phase sequence current Ps Seq A deadband , Ng Seq A 40/0 (=40xIn) deadband , Zro A deadband measurement (CSMSQI) Ps Seq V deadband , Ng Seq V 4/0 (=4xUn) Phase sequence voltage deadband , Zro V deadband...
Page 933 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Figure 500: Complex power and power quadrants Table 891: Power quadrants Quadrant Current Power Lagging 0…+1.00 +ind Lagging 0…-1.00 -cap Leading 0…-1.00 -ind Leading 0…+1.00 +cap The active power P direction can be selected between forward and reverse Active power Dir and correspondingly the reactive power Q direction can with Reactive power Dir .
Page 934: Measurement Function Applications
Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H 8.1.3 Measurement function applications The measurement functions are used for power system measurement, supervision and reporting to LHMI, a monitoring tool within PCM600, or to the station level, for example, with IEC 61850. The possibility to continuously monitor the measured values of active power, reactive power, currents, voltages, power factors and so on, is vital for efficient production, transmission, and distribution of electrical energy.
Page 935 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.1.4.2 Function block Figure 501: Function block 8.1.4.3 Signals Table 892: CMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all bi- nary outputs Table 893: CMMXU Output signals Name...
Page 936 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description A low low limit 0.00...40.00 0.00 Low alarm current limit A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configu- ration value for in- tegral calculation. (percentage of dif- ference between min and max as 0,001 % s) Table 895: CMMXU Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter...
Page 937 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Time max de- Timestamp Time of maxi- mand IL1 mum demand phase A Time max de- Timestamp Time of maxi- mand IL2 mum demand phase B Time max de- Timestamp Time of maxi- mand IL3 mum demand...
Page 938 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_RANGE_B Enum IL2 Amplitude 0=normal range 1=high 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low I_INST_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of in- stantaneous val- I_ANGL_C FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 IL3 current angle I_DB_C FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of re- ported value I_DMD_C...
Page 939: Three-Phase Voltage Measurement Vmmxu
1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.1.4.7 Technical revision history Table 898: CMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change Menu changes Phase current angle values added to Moni- tored data view. Minimum demand value and time added to recorded data. Logarith- mic demand calculation mode added and de- mand interval setting moved under Measure- ment menu as general setting to all demand calculations.
Page 940 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Default Description U_C_CA SIGNAL Phase to earth volt- age C or phase to phase voltage CA BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all bi- nary outputs Table 900: VMMXU Output signals Name Type Description HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm...
Page 941 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.1.5.5 Monitored data Table 903: VMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U12-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured phase to phase voltage amplitude phase U23-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured phase to phase voltage amplitude phase U31-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured phase to phase voltage...
Page 942 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U_RANGE_BC Enum U23 Amplitude 0=normal range 1=high 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low U_INST_CA FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 U31 Amplitude, magnitude of in- stantaneous val- U_ANGL_CA FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 U31 angle U_DB_CA FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 U31 Amplitude, magnitude of re- ported value U_DMD_CA...
Page 943 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.1.5.6 Technical data Table 904: VMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2 At voltages in range 0.01…1.15 × U ±0.5 % or ±0.002 × U Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 944: Single-Phase Voltage Measurement Vammxu
Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H 8.1.6 Single-phase voltage measurement VAMMXU 8.1.6.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Single-phase voltage measurement VAMMXU 8.1.6.2 Function block Figure 503: Function block symbol 8.1.6.3 Signals Table 906: VAMMXU Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 945 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description V low limit 0.00...4.00 0.00 Low warning volt- age limit V low low limit 0.00...4.00 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit V deadband 100...100000 10000 Deadband configu- ration value for in- tegral calculation.
Page 946: Residual Current Measurement Rescmmxu
Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H 8.1.6.6 Technical data Table 911: VAMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2 At voltages in range 0.01…1.15 × U ±0.5 % or ±0.002 × U Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
Page 947 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Table 914: RESCMMXU Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off A Hi high limit res 0.00...40.00 0.20 High alarm current limit A high limit res 0.00...40.00 0.05 High warning cur-...
Page 948: Residual Voltage Measurement Resvmmxu
Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Min demand Io FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Minimum de- mand for residu- al current Time max de- Timestamp Time of maxi- mand Io mum demand re- sidual current Time min de- Timestamp Time of mini- mand Io mum demand re-...
Page 949 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.1.8.2 Function block Figure 505: Function block 8.1.8.3 Signals Table 919: RESVMMXU Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Residual voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all bi- nary outputs Table 920: RESVMMXU Output signals Name Type Description...
Page 950 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H 8.1.8.5 Monitored data Table 923: RESVMMXU Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Uo-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured residu- al voltage U_INST_RES FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Residual voltage Amplitude, mag- nitude of instan- taneous value U_ANGL_RES FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Residual voltage angle U_DB_RES...
Page 951: Frequency Measurement Fmmxu
1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Technical revision Change Internal improvement Internal improvement 8.1.9 Frequency measurement FMMXU 8.1.9.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Frequency measurement FMMXU 8.1.9.2 Function block Figure 506: Function block 8.1.9.3 Functionality The frequency measurement range is 35...75 Hz.
Page 952 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Table 927: FMMXU Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off F high high limit 35.00...75.00 60.00 High alarm fre- quency limit F high limit 35.00...75.00 55.00 High warning fre-...
Page 953: Sequence Current Measurement Csmsqi
1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Table 930: FMMXU Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy ±10 mHz (in measurement range 35...75 Hz) 8.1.9.8 Technical revision history Table 931: FMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change Def frequency Sel . Fre- Added new setting quency measurement range lowered from 35 Hz to 10 Hz.
Page 954 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Table 933: CSMSQI Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Ps Seq A Hi high 0.00...40.00 1.40 High alarm current limit for positive sequence current Ps Seq A high limit 0.00...40.00 1.20...
Page 955 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Zro A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 0.00 Low alarm current limit for zero se- quence current Zro A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configu- ration value for zero sequence current for inte- gral calculation.
Page 956 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I1_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Positive se- quence current angle I1_DB FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Positive se- quence current amplitude, re- ported value I1_RANGE Enum Positive se- 0=normal quence current 1=high amplitude range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low I0_INST...
Page 957: Sequence Voltage Measurement Vsmsqi
1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.1.10.7 Technical revision history Table 936: CSMSQI Technical revision history Technical revision Change Sequence current angle values added to the Monitored data view. Internal improvement. 8.1.11 Sequence voltage measurement VSMSQI 8.1.11.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification...
Page 958 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Table 938: VSMSQI Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Ps Seq V Hi high 0.00...4.00 1.40 High alarm voltage limit for positive sequence voltage Ps Seq V high limit 0.00...4.00 1.20...
Page 959 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Zro V low low Lim 0.00...4.00 0.00 Low alarm voltage limit for zero se- quence voltage Zro V deadband 100...100000 10000 Deadband configu- ration value for zero sequence volt- age for integral cal- culation.
Page 960: Three-Phase Power And Energy Measurement Pemmxu
Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description U1_ANGL FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Positive se- quence voltage angle U1_DB FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Positive se- quence voltage amplitude, re- ported value U1_RANGE Enum Positive se- 0=normal quence voltage 1=high amplitude range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low U0_INST...
Page 961 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.1.12.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase power and energy PEMMXU P, E P, E measurement 8.1.12.2 Function block Figure 509: Function block 8.1.12.3 Signals Table 941: PEMMXU Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 962 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Active power Dir 1=Forward Direction of active 1=Forward power flow: For- 2=Reverse ward, Reverse Reactive power Dir 1=Forward Direction of reac- 1=Forward tive power flow: 2=Reverse Forward, Reverse Table 943: PEMMXU Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
Page 963 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description P_INST FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Active power, 99.9 magnitude of in- stantaneous val- P_DB FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Active power, 99.9 magnitude of re- ported value P_DMD FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Demand value of 99.9 active power Q_INST FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999...
Page 964 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Max demand P FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Maximum de- 99.9 mand value of active power Min demand P FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Minimum de- 99.9 mand value of active power Max demand Q FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Maximum de-...
Page 965: Disturbance Recorder Rdre
1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.1.12.7 Technical revision history Table 946: PEMMXU Technical revision history Technical revision Change Demand values added to Monitored data. Re- corded data added to store minimum and maximum demand values with timestamps. Internal improvement. Internal improvement. Disturbance recorder RDRE 8.2.1 Functionality...
Page 966 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H • Triggering on limit violations of the analog channels of the disturbance recorder (high and low limit) Trig recording parameter (LHMI or communication) • Manual triggering via the • Periodic triggering. Regardless of the triggering type, each recording generates the Recording started and Recording made events.
Page 967 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Periodic triggering feature is intended to be used temporarily for a short-time to record certain network conditions, when other triggering modes cannot be used. Continuous use of periodic triggering is forbidden as it may degrade flash memory life due to continuous frequent write operations.
Page 968 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H 8.2.1.5 Uploading of recordings The protection relay stores COMTRADE files to the C:\COMTRADE\ folder. The files can be uploaded with the PCM600 or any appropriate computer software that can access the C:\COMTRADE\ folder. One complete disturbance recording consists of two COMTRADE file types: the configuration file and the data file.
Page 969 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.2.1.7 Storage mode The disturbance recorder can capture data in two modes: waveform and trend mode. The user can set the storage mode individually for each trigger source Storage mode parameter of the corresponding analog channel or binary with the Stor.
Page 970: Configuration
Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H if it is more important to have the latest recordings in the memory. The saturation mode is preferred, when the oldest recordings are more important. New triggerings are blocked in both the saturation and the overwrite mode until the previous recording is completed.
Page 971: Application
1MRS757644 H Measurement functions The recording always contains all binary channels of the disturbance recorder. If one of the binary channels is disabled, the recorded state of the channel is continuously FALSE and the state changes of the corresponding channel are not recorded. The corresponding channel name for disabled binary channels in the COMTRADE configuration file is Unused BI.
Page 972 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H 8.2.4 Settings Table 948: RDRE Non-group general settings Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description (Range) Operation 1=on 1=on Disturbance recorder 5=off on/off Record length 10...500 fundamental Size of the re- cycles cording in fundamental cycles Pre-trg length 0...100 Length of the recording preceding the...
Page 973 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Table 949: RDRE Non-group channel settings Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description (Range) Operation 1=on Analog chan- 1=on nel is enabled 5=off or disabled Channel se- 0=Disabled Select the sig- 0=Disabled lection nal to be re- 1=Io corded by this channel.
Page 974 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description (Range) Channel id 0 to 64 char- DR analog Identification text acters, alpha- channel X text for the numeric analog chan- nel used in the COM- TRADE format High trigger 0.00...60.00 0.01 10.00...
Page 975: Monitored Data
1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Table 951: RDRE Control data Parameter Values Unit Step Default Description (Range) Trig record- Trigger the 0=Cancel disturbance 1=Trig recording Clear record- Clear all re- 0=Cancel ings cordings cur- 1=Clear rently in memory 8.2.5 Monitored data Table 952: RDRE Monitored data Parameter Values (Range)
Page 976: Tap Changer Position Indicator Tposyltc
Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H Tap changer position indicator TPOSYLTC 8.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE identification identification C37.2 device number Tap changer position indication TPOSYLTC TPOSM 8.3.2 Function block Figure 511: Function block 8.3.3 Functionality The tap changer position indication function TPOSYLTC is used for transformer tap position supervision.
Page 977 1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Figure 512: Functional module diagram Tap position decoder When there is a wired connection to the TAP_POS input connector, the corresponding tap changer position is decoded from the mA or RTD input. When there is no wired connection to the TAP_POS connector, the binary inputs are expected to be used for the tap changer position information.
Page 978 Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H The tap position validity is set to good in all valid cases. The quality is set to bad in invalid combinations in the binary inputs. For example, when the “BCD2INT” mode is selected and the input binary combination is “0001101”, the quality is set to bad. For negative values, when the SIGN_BIT is set to TRUE (1) and the input binary combination is “1011011”, the quality is set to bad.
Page 979: Application
1MRS757644 H Measurement functions Inputs TAP_POS outputs 8.3.5 Application TPOSYLTC provides tap position information for other functions as a signed integer value that can be fed to the tap position input. The position information of the tap changer can be coded in various methods for many applications, for example, the differential protection algorithms.
Page 980: Signals
Measurement functions 1MRS757644 H OLATCC1. When there is no wired connection to the TAP_POS connector, the binary inputs are expected to be used for the tap changer position information. Figure 513: RTD/analog input configuration example 8.3.6 Signals Table 955: TPOSYLTC Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 981: Settings
1MRS757644 H Measurement functions 8.3.7 Settings Table 957: TPOSYLTC Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation Off / On 1=on 5=off Operation mode 2=BCD2INT Operation mode 1=NAT2INT selection 2=BCD2INT 3=GRAY2INT 8.3.8 Monitored data Table 958: TPOSYLTC Monitored data Name Type...
Page 982: Control Functions
Control functions 1MRS757644 H Control functions Circuit breaker control CBXCBR, Disconnector control DCXSWI and Earthing switch control ESXSWI 9.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE identification identification C37.2 device number Circuit breaker control CBXCBR I<->O CB I<->O CB Disconnector control DCXSWI I<->O DCC...
Page 983: Functionality
1MRS757644 H Control functions 9.1.3 Functionality CBXCBR, DCXSWI and ESXSWI are intended for circuit breaker, disconnector and earthing switch control and status information purposes. These functions execute commands and evaluate block conditions and different time supervision conditions. The functions perform an execution command only if all conditions indicate that a switch operation is allowed.
Page 984 Control functions 1MRS757644 H energizing check. The input SYNC_ITL_BYP can be used for bypassing this control. The SYNC_ITL_BYP input can be used to activate CLOSE_ENAD discarding the ENA_CLOSE and SYNC_OK input states. However, the BLK_CLOSE input always blocks the CLOSE_ENAD output. The CB opening (OPEN_ENAD) logic is the same as CB closing logic, except that SYNC_OK is used only in closing.
Page 985 1MRS757644 H Control functions Figure 516: Condition for enabling the close request (CL_REQ) for CBXCBR When the open command is given from communication, via LHMI or activating the AU_OPEN input, it is processed only if OPEN_ENAD is TRUE. OP_REQ output is also available.
Page 986 Control functions 1MRS757644 H Figure 518: OPEN and CLOSE outputs logic for CBXCBR Opening and closing pulse widths Adaptive pulse setting. The function The pulse width type can be defined with the provides two modes to characterize the opening and closing pulse widths. When Adaptive pulse is set to “TRUE”, it causes a variable pulse width, which means that the output pulse is deactivated when the object state shows that the apparatus has entered the correct state.
Page 987: Application
1MRS757644 H Control functions capacity and bandwidth than the SBO method, because the procedure needs fewer messages for accurate operation. The “status-only” mode means that control is not possible (non-controllable) via communication or from LHMI. However, it is possible to control a disconnector (DCXSWI) from AU_OPEN and AU_CLOSE inputs.
Page 988: Signals
Control functions 1MRS757644 H based on the status indication of the related primary components. The interlocking on substation level can be applied using the IEC 61850 GOOSE messages between feeders. REF 615 Control and interlocking via GOOSE messages REF 615 REF 615 REF 615 Figure 520: Status indication-based interlocking via the GOOSE messaging...
Page 989 1MRS757644 H Control functions Name Type Default Description SYNC_OK BOOLEAN 1=True Synchronism-check OK SYNC_ITL_BYP BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE interlocking when TRUE Table 963: DCXSWI Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus open position POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Apparatus close position ENA_OPEN...
Page 990 Control functions 1MRS757644 H Name Type Description EXE_CL BOOLEAN Executes the command for close di- rection OP_REQ BOOLEAN Open request CL_REQ BOOLEAN Close request OPENPOS BOOLEAN Signal for open position of appara- tus from I/O CLOSEPOS BOOLEAN Signal for close position of appara- tus from I/O OKPOS BOOLEAN...
Page 991: Settings
1MRS757644 H Control functions 9.1.7 Settings Table 968: CBXCBR Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=on Operation mode 1=on on/off 5=off Select timeout 10000...300000 10000 30000 Select timeout in Pulse length 10...60000 Open and close pulse length Control model 4=sbo-with-en-...
Page 992 Control functions 1MRS757644 H Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation timeout 10...60000 30000 Timeout for nega- tive termination Identification DCXSWI1 switch Control Object position identification Table 971: DCXSWI Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation counter 0...10000...
Page 993: Monitored Data
1MRS757644 H Control functions 9.1.8 Monitored data Table 974: CBXCBR Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description POSITION Dbpos Apparatus position in- 0=intermediate dication 1=open 2=closed 3=faulty Table 975: DCXSWI Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description POSITION Dbpos Apparatus position in- 0=intermediate...
Page 994: Disconnector Position Indicator Dcsxswi And Earthing Switch Indication Essxswi
Control functions 1MRS757644 H Table 978: DCXSWI Technical revision history Technical revision Change Maximum and default values changed to 60 Event delay set- s and 10 s respectively for Oper- tings. Default value changed to 30 s for ation timeout setting. Outputs OPENPOS CLOSEPOS...
Page 995: Functionality
1MRS757644 H Control functions 9.2.3 Functionality The functions DCSXSWI and ESSXSWI indicate remotely and locally the open, close and undefined states of the disconnector and earthing switch. The functionality of both is identical, but each one is allocated for a specific purpose visible in the function names.
Page 996 Control functions 1MRS757644 H 9.2.6 Signals Table 981: DCSXSWI Input signals Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of appara- tus from I/O POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for closed position of appa- ratus from I/O Table 982: ESSXSWI Input signals Name Type Default...
Page 997: Settings
1MRS757644 H Control functions 9.2.7 Settings Table 985: DCSXSWI Non group settings (Basic) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Identification DCSXSWI1 switch Control Object position identification Table 986: DCSXSWI Non group settings (Advanced) Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Event delay 0...60000...
Page 998: Technical Revision History
Control functions 1MRS757644 H Table 990: ESSXSWI Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description POSITION Dbpos Apparatus position in- 0=intermediate dication 1=open 2=closed 3=faulty 9.2.9 Technical revision history Table 991: DCSXSWI Technical revision history Technical revision Change Maximum and default values changed to 60 Event delay set- s and 30 s respectively for tings.
Page 999: Functionality
1MRS757644 H Control functions 9.3.2 Function block Figure 523: Function block 9.3.3 Functionality The synchronism and energizing check function SECRSYN checks the condition across the circuit breaker from separate power system parts and gives the permission to close the circuit breaker. SECRSYN includes the functionality of synchrocheck and energizing check.
Page 1000 Control functions 1MRS757644 H Energizing check Synchro check Figure 524: Functional module diagram If Energizing check is passed, no further conditions need to be fulfilled to permit closing. Otherwise, Synchro check function can operate either with the U_AB or U_A VT connection setting voltages.
Page 1001 1MRS757644 H Control functions Live dead mode Description One Live, Dead Bus de-energized and line energized or line de-energized and bus energized Not Both Live Both line and bus de-energized or bus de- energized and line energized or line de-ener- gized and bus energized When the energizing direction corresponds to the settings, the situation has to be Energizing time setting before the circuit breaker...

ABB RELION 620 Series Technical Manual

Quick Links

Related Manuals for ABB RELION 620 Series

Summary of Contents for ABB RELION 620 Series